JP6546885B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

  As a game machine, when a game ball is shot by a launch device into a game area by a launch device and the game ball is won in a prize area such as a prize port provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to In addition, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as "variation") is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, Therefore, there is one configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player by changing the state of the machine, specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for a predetermined game medium to one game, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each variable By operating a stop button provided corresponding to the display device, variable display of identification information is stopped within a predetermined maximum delay time range from the operation timing, and variable display of all variable display devices is performed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined gaming medium predetermined according to the prize is paid out, and a specific prize is generated, the gaming state is determined to be a predetermined gaming value to the player There is one which is configured to be in a state of giving to (so-called slot machine).

  The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is in an advantageous state for a player who is easy to hit a ball, or a right for a player to be in an advantageous state. Or the condition for winning the prize ball to be satisfied easily.

  In pachinko gaming machines, a specific display mode defined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started on the variable display device based on the game ball having won the start winning opening. If you do, a "big hit" occurs. In addition, derivation | leading-out display is making a symbol (final stop symbol) finally stop-display. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a transition is made to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball tends to be won. And, in each opening period, when there are winnings to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). In addition, an open time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each open, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the open time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

  Furthermore, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left middle right symbol) continue for a predetermined time, and stop and shake in a state consistent with the specific display result. Motion, scaling, or deformation, or multiple symbols fluctuating in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of display symbols are changed, and a big hit can occur before the final result is displayed An effect performed in a state in which the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a "reach state") is referred to as a reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “off”, and the fluctuation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In such a gaming machine, it is described in cited reference 1 that, during the variable display, the effect for prompting the operation of the effect button and the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button are performed. In addition, the effect for promoting the operation of the effect button is performed by displaying an image imitating the appearance of the effect button, and the degree of expectation is made different depending on the difference in the display mode of the image (for example, the difference in size or color) It is described.

JP, 2013-188306, A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it is difficult to understand that the degree of expectation is different.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of showing the expectation to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention fires gaming media (for example, gaming ball P etc.) in a gaming area (for example, gaming area 9010 etc.) and performs variable display when predetermined conditions are satisfied. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and the gaming area (eg, gaming board 902, board 90200, etc.) A colliding body (for example, an inner rail 90501 / first outer rail 90502 / second outer rail 90503 etc.) attached to the game board to surround the game medium and guiding the game medium and the game medium collide (for example, An elastic member (e.g., an elastic member 90600) that is attached to the game board and holds the collided object at a predetermined position on the game board Rail decoration frame 90410 etc. attached to the game board 902 in a closed state) and a second holding body for holding the first holding body attached to the game board (for example, a presser bracket 90162a for holding the rail decoration frame 90410) Rail holding piece 90174, second outer rail 90503, glass door frame 9050 etc.) and detection means (eg, push button 120, stick controller 122, infrared sensor etc.) capable of detecting the operation of the player on the operation means Promotion notification means (for example, microcomputer 100 for effect control) capable of executing promotion notification (for example, operation promotion notification for displaying the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image) for urging the player to operate the operation means Execute steps S8111, S8125, S8139, S8153, and S8167. ) And, based on the operation of the operating unit of the player is detected by the detecting means, a predetermined effect (e.g., executable demonstration execution means each button effect) (e.g., a game control microcomputer 100 step S8114, S8128, S8142, S8156, S8170) and specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect of any of a plurality of effect modes during execution of variable display The promotion notification means indicates at least an operation means for promoting notification for promoting one operation (for example, any of pressing the push button 120 once, pressing continuously, and long pressing). -promoting image (e.g., the first operation promoting image simulating the appearance of the push button 120) and Table Shimesuru first pattern, the first accelerator It is possible to execute with the second pattern which displays the 2nd promotion image (for example, the 2nd operation promotion picture which shows a predetermined character) which shows the operation mode to the above-mentioned operation means in addition to the picture (refer to Drawing 32-Drawing 34) When performing the promotion notification when the specific effect is being performed, the user operates the operation mode in any one of a plurality of operation modes at different rates according to the effect mode of the specific effect being performed. (C) to make the degree of expectation for being controlled in the advantageous state different (for example, according to which of the first pattern and the second pattern is used to execute the promotion notification). The first effect aspect of the button effect at the time of success or failure when the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern, and the second of the operation effect notification when the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern The representation embodiment and the third representation embodiment, different expectations. FIG. 32 (c) is possible, and the rail member is a fixed part (for example, fixed part 90504T, 90504U, etc.) fixed to the game board and a part which is not fixed to the game board and is flexible. And a non-fixed portion (for example, non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C etc.) having elasticity, and the non-fixed portion has a contact portion (for example, protrusions 90507A to 90507F / standing wall portion 513 etc.) An abutted portion (e.g., a recess 90207A to 90207F or the like) to which the abutting portion can abut is provided on a board surface of the game board , and one of the abutted portion and the abutted portion is The other is a hole into which the protrusion is inserted, and the protrusion and the hole extend in a direction orthogonal to the board surface of the game board, and the rail member is the game board When attached to Part becomes inserted state into the hole portion, in a state in which the protrusion is inserted into the hole, a gap is formed between the projection and the inner surface of the hole (e.g., projection 90507A When ~ 90507F is inserted into the recess 90207A ~ 90207F, a void S is formed around the protrusions 90507A ~ 90507F./A gap (spaced dimension between the upright wall portion 90513 and the third guiding member unit 90302 59, 60, and 61) , when the game medium collides with the non-fixed portion and the non-fixed portion moves, the projection contacts the inner surface of the hole. It is characterized by contact .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to show the player an expectation level in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, when game media collide with the rail member, damage to the rail member can be suppressed by absorbing the impact by bending the non-fixed portion, and the contact portion contacts the abutted portion. Since the non-fixed portion is prevented from being largely displaced, the game medium can be stably guided. Furthermore, the stability of the first holding body is improved by holding the first holding body holding the collided body by the second holding body in a state where the first holding body is attached to the game board, and thus the positional deviation of the crashed body It can control that game nature is spoiled.

(Means 2) In means 1, the promotion notification means includes the first promotion image in a plurality of modes (for example, the first operation promotion image (small) or the first operation promotion image (middle), the first operation promotion image (large) Etc., and the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the first promotion image is displayed (for example, operation promotion for displaying the first operation promotion image (middle) The first effect mode of the button effect at the time of notification that the notification is performed and the second effect mode and the third effect mode of the button effect at the time of the operation failure notification that the first operation promotion image (large) is displayed The degree of expectation is different, and may be configured as shown in FIG.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be improved.

(Means 3) In means 1 or 2, the prompt notification means has the second prompt image in any of a plurality of modes (for example, the second operation prompt image (push), the second operation prompt image (one strike), etc.) It can be displayed, and the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the second promotion image is displayed (for example, the operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image (press) is performed. The second presentation mode of the hour button presentation and the third presentation mode of the button presentation with the success or failure at which the operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image (one blow) is performed are different in the degree of expectation. Reference) may be configured.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be improved.

(Means 4) In any of the means 1 to 3, the effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect at a plurality of timings (for example, at the time of high speed fluctuation of the effect pattern, at the reach establishment, at the hit, etc.) 31 (refer to FIG. 31), the promotion notifying means executes the promotion notification by either the first pattern or the second pattern at different rates according to the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed (for example, at the time of high speed fluctuation) At the timing when the button effect is performed and the timing when the reach effect is performed, the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern at a rate of 100%, and at the timing when the button effect is performed, When the display result is a release, the operation prompting notification is performed by the first pattern (the second pattern at the ratio of 30%) at the ratio of 70%, and the display is performed. When fruit is big hit performs an operation promoting notification by the first pattern at a rate of 35% (second pattern at a ratio of 65%). See Figure 32) may be configured so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to 4, the detection means includes operation means (for example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122, etc.) operable by the player, and the effect execution means is the operation means A predetermined effect (for example, each button effect) can be executed according to an operation on the effective period informing means (for example, effect control for notifying an effective period in which the operation is effective (for example, displaying a remaining effective period image) When the microcomputer 100 executes steps S8112 and S8119 and the like, and when the term of validity ends, an end notification indicating the end of the term of validity is issued (for example, an image indicating the end of term of validity is displayed) end notification means (for example, For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 includes a portion for executing step S8116) And an end notification is issued when the operation is performed until the end of the effective period (for example, a portion that executes step S8116 when the effect control microcomputer 100 is determined to be Y in step S8113). It may be configured.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the effective period has ended based on the operation.

(Means 6) In any of the means 1 to 5, the detection means includes operation means (for example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122, etc.) operable by the player, and the effect execution means is the operation means Including an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect (for example, an operation unit effect) using an image, and the promotion notification means includes an acceleration image (for example, an operation promotion image) for prompting an operation when the operation effect is executed. The operation effect execution means includes a display control means to be displayed on the display means, and the operation effect execution means has a plurality of modes (for example, "white", "red", "white / vibration", and "white / vibration" shown in FIG. The display control means changes the promotion image into a plurality of modes (for example, “white / small”, “red / small”, “white / white” shown in FIG. 45 according to the degree of expectation). According to either "large" or "red / large" It has a common image display control means for displaying and displaying a promotion image in a mode common to a plurality of modes of the operation means (for example, “white” (“white / small” and “white / large”) shown in FIG. 45) It may be configured as follows.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be improved.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following means 7-20 is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. In a pachinko gaming machine or the like as a gaming machine, generally, it is attached so as to surround a gaming area of a board and has a rail member for guiding a gaming medium which has been driven in by a ball striking device. In this type of game machine, a plurality of press-fit pins are provided on the back side of a rail member made of a synthetic resin as disclosed in JP-A-2010-131444, and the press-fit pins are provided on a board. There has been a case where the rail member is attached to the board by press-fitting into the formed hole. In this gaming machine, since the rail member is fixed to the board by the press-fit pins, for example, when the game medium flowing down the game area collides with the rail member, the impact can not be released, and the rail member or press-fit There is a problem that the pin is loaded and may be damaged. In view of this problem, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can be mounted on a game board so as not to damage the rail member.

(Means 7) In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to another aspect is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that plays a game by firing a gaming medium (for example, gaming ball P) in a gaming area (for example, gaming area 9010),
A game board (for example, a game board 902, a board 90200),
A rail member (for example, inner rail 90501 / first outer rail 90502 / second outer rail 90503 etc.) attached to the gaming board to surround the gaming area and guiding gaming media;
An impacted object (eg, an elastic member 90600) with which the game medium collides;
A first holding body attached to the game board and holding the collided object at a predetermined position on the game board (for example, a rail decoration frame 90410 attached to the game board 902 with an elastic member 90600 attached);
A second holding body for holding the first holding body attached to the game board (for example, a rail pressing piece 90174, a second outer rail 90503, a glass door frame 9050 of a panel pressing member 90162a for pressing a rail decoration frame 90410) ,
Equipped with
The rail member is
Fixed parts (for example, fixed parts 90504T, 90504U) fixed to the game board;
And a non-fixed portion (for example, non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C) which is a portion not fixed to the game board and has flexibility.
The non-fixed portion has a contact portion (for example, protrusions 90507A to 90507F / standing wall portion 513),
The gaming board side is provided with an abutted portion (for example, recessed portions 90207A to 90207F) to which the abutting portion can abut,
When the rail member is attached to the game board, a gap is formed between the contact portion and the abutted portion (for example, the protrusions 90507A to 90507F are inserted into the recesses 90207A to 90207F. In this case, the air gap S is formed around the protrusions 90507A to 90507F / the air gap (distance dimension L5) is formed between the upright wall portion 90513 and the third guiding member unit 90302. FIGS. , See Figure 61)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the game medium collides with the rail member, the non-fixed portion is flexed to absorb the impact, whereby damage to the rail member can be suppressed and the contact portion is the abutted portion. Since the non-fixed portion is prevented from being largely displaced by the contact, the game medium can be stably guided. In addition, since the stability of the first holding body is improved by the second holding body being held by the second holding body while the first holding body holding the collided body is attached to the game board, the positional deviation of the collided body It can control that game nature is spoiled.

(Means 8) The gaming machine of Means 8 is the gaming machine described in Means 7, and
One of the contact portion (for example, projections 90507A to 90507F) and the abutted portion (for example, recesses 90207A to 90207F) is a projection, and the other is a recess or a hole into which the projection is inserted. (The protrusions 90507A to 90507F are inserted into the recesses 90207A to 90207F)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the protrusion abuts on the inner periphery of the recess or the hole, the large displacement of the non-fixed portion is prevented.

(Means 9) The gaming machine of Means 9 is the gaming machine described in Means 7 or 8, and
The abutted portion is a structure (e.g., third guiding member unit 90302 / first guiding member unit 90300 / second guiding member unit 90301) provided on the gaming board (e.g. gaming board 902, board 9020). Etc.).
According to this feature, since the rail member only needs to abut on the abutted portion, the structure of the rail member can be simplified.

(Means 10) The gaming machine of Means 10 is the gaming machine described in Means 9, and
An air gap (e.g., a separation dimension L5) is formed between the contact portion (e.g., the upright wall portion 90513) and the structure (e.g., the third guiding member unit 90302), and a game medium (e.g., far ball P1) is formed. ) Collides with the non-fixed portion (for example, non-fixed portion 90505A) so that the contact portion abuts against the structure (for example, when the far ball P1 collides with the non-fixed portion 90505A) Abuts on the third guiding member unit 90302)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the contact portion does not always contact the abutted portion, it is possible to suppress deterioration due to wear.

(Means 11) The gaming machine of Means 11 is the gaming machine described in Means 7 to 10, and
The game board (for example, game board 902, board 90200) has a structure (for example, third guiding member unit 90302 / first guiding member unit 90300 / second guiding member unit 90301 / label pasting portion 90520 second Outer rail 90503 etc.),
The structure is
A first structure (for example, a third guiding member unit 90302) which can be removed from the game board without removing the rail member (for example, the inner rail 90501);
A second structure (for example, a second outer rail 90503) which can not be removed from the game board unless the rail member is removed;
(For example, for the first structure such as the third guiding member unit 90302, it is possible to easily remove and replace the inner rail 90501 from the plate 90200 without removing it, while the fraudulent The second outer rail 90503 having the label attaching portion 90520 to which the target label is attached, such as the second structure whose removal is to be difficult, is difficult to remove from the panel plate 90200 using the rail member. Example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first structure can be easily replaced, and the second structure can be difficult to remove using the rail member.

(Means 12) The gaming machine of Means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Means 7 to 11, and
The rail member (for example, the inner rail 90501 / the first outer rail 90502 / the second outer rail 90503 etc.) has a first portion (for example, the non-fixed portion 90505A) and a second portion (strength) higher than the first portion For example, it is characterized by at least including non-fixed portions 90505 B and 90505 C and fixed portions 90504 T and 90504 U).
According to this feature, it is possible to give strength according to the fixed part and the non-fixed part.

(Means 13) The gaming machine of Means 13 is the gaming machine according to any of Means 8 to 12, and
A groove (e.g., groove 90509) is formed around the projection (e.g., projections 90507A to 90507F) of the rail member (e.g., inner rail 90501 / first outer rail 90502 / second outer rail 90503). It is characterized by being
According to this feature, powder, scraps, and the like generated by the contact between the protrusion and the recess or the hole enter the groove and are less likely to scatter around.

(Means 14) The gaming machine of Means 14 is the gaming machine according to Means 7 to 13, and
The first holding body can not be removed from the game board unless the holding state by the second holding body is released (for example, the glass door frame 9050 is opened, and the board pressing metal 90162a, the second outer rail 90503, and the screw You can not remove the rail decoration frame 90410 from the game board 902 if you do not remove the N1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it can be suppressed that the first holding body is easily removed from the game board.

(Means 15) The gaming machine of Means 15 is the gaming machine described in Means 7 to 14, and
The first holding body is a restricting portion that restricts displacement of the collided body from the holding position (for example, a rail ornament that engages with the elastic member 90600 and restricts displacement of the elastic member 90600 from the holding position) A plate-like portion 90425 and a projecting portion 90422 of the first holding portion 90421 of the frame 90410, and an engaged portion 90427 of the second holding portion 90423 / engaging projection 90428 of the second holding portion 90423) are characterized.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the game property from being impaired due to the positional displacement of the collided body with respect to the first holding body.

(Means 16) The gaming machine of Means 16 is the gaming machine described in Means 15, and
The restricting portion is an abutting surface on which the collided body abuts in a state where the colliding body is held, and a plurality of abutting surfaces having different directions (for example, the first holding portion 90421 of the rail decoration frame 90410 The second embodiment is characterized in that the plate-like portion 90425 is composed of an inner side surface that abuts on the elastic member 90600, and a surface of the second holding portion 90423 that abuts on the elastic member 90600.
According to this feature, since the colliding body can be pressed by the plurality of contact surfaces having different directions, the positional deviation of the colliding body can be suitably suppressed.

(Means 17) The gaming machine of Means 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Means 7 to 16, and
The first holding body is integrally formed with a passage forming portion forming a passage through which game media can pass (for example, a decorative frame 90800 in which a rail decorative frame, a center decorative frame, and a passing path are integrally formed. Modification 1 of FIG.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress that the game property is lost due to the positional relationship between the first holding body and the passage being shifted.

(Means 18) A gaming machine according to means 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 7 to 17,
The first holding body has a holding pin (for example, a protruding portion 90422 of the first holding portion 90421 of the rail decoration frame 90410) inserted into an insertion hole formed in the collided body,
The holding pin is characterized in that the outer diameter on the base side is larger than the outer diameter on the tip side.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the durability of the holding pin against the impact generated on the impacted body.

(Means 19) The gaming machine according to Means 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Measures 7 to 18,
The first holding body has a holding pin (for example, a protruding portion 90422 of the first holding portion 90421 of the rail decoration frame 90410) inserted into an insertion hole formed in the collided body,
A hollow portion (for example, a recess 90426 of the first holding portion 90421) is formed inside the holding pin.
According to this feature, since the strength of the holding pin is increased, the durability is improved.

(Means 20) The gaming machine of Means 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Means 7-19,
The colliding body is held by the first holding body such that at least a collision portion where the game medium collides is positioned outside the first holding body (for example, the colliding surface 90601 of the elastic member 90600 is a rail decoration) It is held by the first holding portion 90421 in a state of protruding from the first holding portion 90421 of the frame 90410)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress that the game medium collides with the first holding body and the first holding body is broken.

  The present invention may have only the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and together with the invention specific matters described in the claims of the invention, configurations other than the invention specific matters You may have.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. FIG. 6 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the configuration of a pending specific area and a pending storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop symbol and a temporary stop symbol of a production symbol. It is an explanatory view showing an example of execution timing of each button production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the button production setting table at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button presentation setting table at the time of reach establishment, and the button presentation setting table at the time of passing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a continuous hit button effect setting table and a long press button effect setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of operation promotion alerting | reporting. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of button production at the time of yes or no. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of a detection effective period completion alerting | reporting. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of operation part production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an operation part presentation setting table. It is the front view which looked at an example of a pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the pachinko game machine of the state which opened the glass door frame. FIG. 2 is a front view showing a gaming machine frame to which a gaming board is attached. (A) is a perspective view showing the upper clamp, and (B) is a perspective view showing the lower clamp. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing a structure of a spacer member forming a game area, a board, a guide rail (first outer rail, second outer rail, inner rail), and a rail decoration frame. (A) is a front view which shows the structure of an inner rail, (B) is a rear view similarly. It is a perspective view which shows a part of back side of an inner rail. (A) is an AA sectional view of FIG. 53 (B), and (B) is a BB sectional view of the same. It is a front view which shows the structure of a board. (A) is an enlarged view of enclosure A of FIG. 53 (B), (B) is an enlarged view of enclosure B similarly. (A) is CC sectional drawing of FIG. 56, (B) is DD sectional drawing similarly. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view in the state which attached the inner rail to the panel board. (A) is a schematic view showing an aspect in which the gaming ball flows down the first path, (B) is an enlarged view of a main part of (A), and (C) is an E-E cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is the schematic which shows the state which the foul ball | bowl collided with the inner rail, (B) is FF sectional drawing of (A). It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the right side part of a rail decoration frame. (A) is a rear view of the right side part of a rail decoration frame, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), (C) is an H-H sectional view of (A). (A) is six views showing composition of an elastic member, (B) is an II sectional view of (A). (A) is a perspective view which shows the structure of the right end part of a 1st outer rail, (B) is a perspective view which shows the other structure of the right end part of a 1st outer rail. (A) is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine, (B) is a plan sectional view of the pachinko gaming machine shown in (A). (A) is a front view of the right side part of the rail decoration frame as a modification 1, (B) is JJ sectional drawing of (A). (A) is a perspective view which shows the modification of the elastic member as the modification 2, (B) is sectional drawing of the modification of (A). (A) is a rear view of the right side part of the rail decoration frame as a modification 3, (B) is KK sectional drawing of (A).

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 122 capable of holding and tilting in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), and performs predetermined operations by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) which can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling the trigger button 121 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 122 or the like. Also, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing the predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in the upper and lower positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower dishes. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be shifted to either the left or the right in the upper and lower plates while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, and may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. There are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided which display a fourth symbol following the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (but, correctly, the variation display of the presentation symbol changes on the microcomputer 100 side for presentation control) It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the rendering using the rendering display 9, for example, the content of the rendering including the fluctuation display of the rendering pattern disappears from the screen for a moment Effects are being diversified, such as effects being performed, and effects such as moving objects blocking all or part of the screen being performed. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the state is currently in the state of fluctuating display. So, in this embodiment, by performing the variation display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, is the state of the present variation display now by confirming the state of the fourth symbol? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. In addition, since the 4th design is always changed and displayed in a fixed operation, and it does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, it can always be viewed.

  In addition, when the gaming machine is configured to provide the movable member in the game area, the fourth symbol is displayed in the area where the visual recognition is not hindered even if the movable member is at any position in the game area. It should be configured to

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the "fourth symbol", and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol The fourth symbol display area 9d for 2 special symbols may be generically referred to as "fourth symbol display area".

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, the display color that reminds of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the off. For example, the off) Sometimes it is displayed in blue while it is displayed in red when it is a big hit Note that the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a positive variation big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a game ball at the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden odd change big hit), and a plurality of big hit types with different number of rounds If it can be controlled, the display color may be different depending on the number of rounds continued in the big hit game, and as in this embodiment, the number of rounds for each big hit is the same. Even if, for example, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is short (for example 1 second), the big hit which can not expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening substantially, and the big winning opening per round If the opening time is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can expect a game ball to reach a substantial winning opening substantially, whether or not it can substantially expect a winning of the game ball to a large winning opening For example, by changing the number of times the opening of the large winning opening per round, it is expected that the jackpot can be expected to be winning the game ball to the large winning opening substantially Even when there is a big hit that can not be made, the display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to be substantially winning the big winning opening.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, the display color that recalls the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (a display color different from the off. For example, the off) Sometimes it is displayed in blue while it is displayed in red when it is a big hit Note that the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a positive variation big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a game ball at the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden odd change big hit), and a plurality of big hit types with different number of rounds If it can be controlled, the display color may be different depending on the number of rounds continued in the big hit game, and as in this embodiment, the number of rounds for each big hit is the same. Even if, for example, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is short (for example 1 second), the big hit which can not expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening substantially, and the big winning opening per round If the opening time is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can expect a game ball to reach a substantial winning opening substantially, whether or not it can substantially expect a winning of the game ball to a large winning opening For example, by changing the number of times the opening of the large winning opening per round, it is expected that the jackpot can be expected to be winning the game ball to the large winning opening substantially Even when there is a big hit that can not be made, the display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to be substantially winning the big winning opening.

  The display color when the fourth symbol display area 9c, 9d is turned off is a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display image from being disintegrated with the background image when the light is turned off. It is desirable to have.

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area is provided in part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, but separately from the effect display device 9, a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which two LEDs are alternately lit, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be displayed whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided respectively corresponding to the separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d is shown, the first special symbol and the second special are illustrated. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, the fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized using a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as repeating display and display of different display colors at predetermined time intervals. Also, for example, when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, for example The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as turning on and off repeatedly at different time intervals. Also, for example, the same big hit symbol is used for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, stop symbols of different modes may be stopped and displayed.

  On the right of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Also, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a) Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbol", and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be referred to as "special symbol indicator (variable display unit Sometimes referred to as ")".

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as "starting winning opening" or "starting opening".

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win the second start winning hole 14. And although the first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display 9, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 9 and the first start winning opening 13 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to guide the gaming balls to the first start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails closely around 13 or by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13, and the winning rate of the second start winning opening 14 You may make it be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided to perform the opening and closing operation only for the second starting winning opening 14, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 13 The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball device that performs opening and closing operations is provided for any of the start winning openings 14.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol suspension storage indicator 18b, the number of activated winning balls entering the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first suspension storage number (pending storage is also referred to as start storage or start prize storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In addition, an area (total holding storage display unit) 18c displaying the total number (total holding storage number) which is the total of the first holding storage number and the second holding storage number in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9c. Is provided. In this embodiment, by providing the combined hold storage display unit 18c that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. . Note that instead of the total pending storage number display unit 18c, a first pending storage display unit for displaying the first pending storage number and a second pending storage display unit for displaying the second pending storage number are provided. May be

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in the combined hold storage display unit 18c that the display is performed without distinction as to whether the display is a hold display corresponding to the first hold storage or a hold display corresponding to the second hold storage. However, it may be distinguishably displayed whether it is the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage or the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage. For example, in this embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in the normal mode, black is uniformly displayed without distinction as to whether the hold display corresponds to the first hold storage or the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage. In the case of displaying the circular display of the first display, the display of the display corresponding to the first storage in the form of a black circular display while the display of the display corresponding to the second storage in the second display of yellow is shown It may be distinguishable by displaying. Further, for example, the shape of the hold display may be different between the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display, for example, the numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols). Also, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED etc., for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "o" and "x") May be composed of

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a hit symbol, for example, a symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the variation display of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits and the symbol is increased is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. In addition, even in the short time state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), which is not a definite change state but the symbol variation time is shortened, the opening time and the opening number of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided. In this embodiment, the effect sound can be output by at least three types of volume: low volume, medium volume, and high volume. Further, in this embodiment, the frame LED 28 can be lighted by at least three colors of white, red and rainbow.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 2 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, the game state is shifted to a high probability state (probable change state) when becoming a probability change big hit, and the game ball becomes easy to get started (that is, the special symbol display 8a, 8b or the effect) A transition is made to a high base state which is a gaming state controlled such that execution conditions of variable display in the display device 9 are easily established) (in this embodiment, transition to a time saving state). Also, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, it shifts to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a time reduction state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, so the variation of the special symbol and the representation symbol starts It is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence (in other words, the quickening of the reserve memory) and the occurrence of an invalid start winning. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, part or all of which is created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as a backup power source discharges and the backup power source can not supply power). Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as a special symbol process flag or a probability change flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 503 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, the predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the random number circuit 503 is set as an initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for giving detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the main circuit board is also a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output of

  The effect control means is also connected to the trigger sensor 125 provided in the stick controller 122, the tilt direction sensor unit 123, the vibrator motor 126, and the push sensor 124 provided in the push button 120, as described later. (See FIG. 3), but illustration is omitted in FIG.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined effect period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect symbol).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is inputted becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply (steps S41 to S43). Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, the CPU 56 transmits to the effect control board 80 a display result designating command designating the display result (usually a big hit, a positive change big hit, a sudden positive change big hit, a small hit, or a drop) stored in the backup RAM (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, if the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, for example, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command (see FIG. 9). You may do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation specification command or the second symbol variation specification command.

  In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the fluctuation time timer described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been saved is restarted, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of a special symbol process flag described later. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process processing is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  It should be noted that the CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the fluctuation time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0 or not, instead of transmitting the display result specification command at the time of power failure recovery. . Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, it is fluctuating at power failure. It may be determined not to be in the state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  The CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is three. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates at power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command is not transmitted, judging that it is not inside.

  In this embodiment, although both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for performing selective processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determination of a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, and a special symbol process flag The value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). ) Is sent to the sub-substrate (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of random R, for example, by executing processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  In the present embodiment, the reach effect is performed using the effect pattern variably displayed in the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is made a big hit symbol, reach production is always executed (However, in the case of sudden positive change big hit, sudden change positive hit large hit symbol (for example "135") without becoming reach) May appear stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not made a big hit symbol, the microcomputer 560 for game control decides whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery for determining a variation pattern type and a variation pattern using random numbers. Do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the control of the reach effect.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Subsequently, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states of them are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, drive signals are output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro-circuit mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 changes the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process May be performed in

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined rendering symbols that do not reach will be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") when the variable display result is a lost design.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach out") when the variable display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Finally, in the "left", "middle" and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped (in the case of sudden definite variation big hit) There is also a case where a sudden change big hit symbol (for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed without reaching.

  When "5" which is a small hit is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect design in the effect display device 9 is "suddenly, certain variation big hit" In the same manner as in the above case, after the variable display of the rendering symbol is performed, a predetermined small hitting symbol (suddenly the same symbol as the probability changing big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a "small hit" variable display mode .

  Here, the small hit is an allowed hit up to the number of times the number of opening of the large winning opening is smaller than the number of the large winning opening (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 seconds). When the small hit game is over, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the positive change state to the normal state or from the normal state to the positive change state. In addition, the sudden change big hit is allowed the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is small in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening time of 0.1 seconds twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely It is a short jackpot, and it is a jackpot to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to a definite change state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it were suddenly changed to a definite change state Is). That is, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is the same between the sudden change big hit and the small hit suddenly. By controlling in this way, when the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit suddenly. (Perspective change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA 1-1-1-1 as non-reach PA-1 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off” and the variable display mode of the rendering symbol is “non-reach”. The fluctuation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect pattern is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 The variation patterns of Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-2 and Super PB 3-1 to Super PB 3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 which is used when non-reaching and is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream. In the case of using the normal PB2-1 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and which are accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-2 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is to execute the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol, normal PA 2-3 to normal PA 2-4, normal PB 2-3 to normal The variation patterns of PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, super PB3-3 to super PB3-4, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are prepared. There is. In FIG. 6, the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-3 and the variation pattern of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability variation hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns which are used when there is not a sudden positive big hit and which is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, in the case of using the normal PB2-3, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-4 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 which is used in the case of a sudden definite big hit and which is accompanied by a pseudo rendition.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo link, the fluctuation time is 32). Fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo run, the variation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds), but even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, for example The fluctuation time may be varied according to the total number of pending storages. For example, even with the same type of super reach, as the total number of pending storages increases, the variation time may be shortened. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, in the case of performing variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the first number of pending storage, (2) In the case of performing variable display of a special symbol, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of pending storages. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3, 4 It is also possible to prepare a variation pattern type determination table for use), select the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number, and make the variation time different.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot described later, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR 2): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the random 4 initial value)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and determines the variation using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) It is determined to be one of the variation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the features of the variation modes. For example, a plurality of change patterns may be grouped by reach type, and divided into a change pattern type including a change pattern accompanied by a normal reach and a change pattern type including a change pattern accompanied by a super reach. Also, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations in the pseudo sequence, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern not accompanied by a pseudo sequence, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, and It may be divided into a variation pattern type including two variation patterns and a variation pattern type including three variation patterns. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped by the presence or absence of an effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating a jackpot type determination random number of (1) and a random number per normal symbol determination of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a short time state (that is, a gaming state that is not a definite change state), and a probability change big hit determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 8A in the positive change time jackpot determination table Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 8C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hitting determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8C may not be provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state. Even if the small hit occurs even when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state, and if it is configured to perform an effect asking whether or not to be the positive change, although the current playing state is the positive changing state Rather, it makes the player feel bothersome. Therefore, if small hits are not generated during the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits are less likely to be generated when the gaming state is a definite change state, and a turning effect for a definite change is not performed more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the big hit judgment values are matched, it is decided to make it a big hit (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. If the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when using the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), it is determined to be a small hit at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where it is determined to be a small hit at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of The percentage determined as "small hit" is higher than when variable display is performed.

  8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 8E shows the case where the jackpot type is determined by using the retention memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the big hit classification determination table 131a, 131b is to make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "normal big hit", based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, " It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either “probability big hit” or “suddenly big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), five judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes Whereas in the big hit category determination table 131b, one decision value is assigned to "sudden oddity big hit" (a ratio of 1/40). The case where it is determined to be a definite big hit suddenly. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of As compared with the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 131a, and "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 131b (that is, , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), a sudden probability big hit as a first specific gaming state for giving a predetermined amount of gaming value and an amount larger than the gaming value There are cases where it is decided that 15 rounds of normal big hit or probability variation big hit as the second specific gaming state to give gaming value and the first specific gaming state at a high rate when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed Although the case where it is determined to be is shown, the game value to be provided is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, as the gaming value to determine the second specific gaming state to increase the allowable number of winning number (count number) of gaming balls to the large winning opening per round It is also good. In addition, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state may be determined in which the opening time of the big winning opening per jackpot as a gaming value is increased as the gaming value. Also, for example, even if it is a big hit of the same 15 rounds, a first specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened once per round, and a second specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times per round The game value of the second specific gaming state may be enhanced by preparing and opening the number of times of opening of the special winning opening substantially. In this case, for example, in either the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, all 15 rounds) In the case of the second specific gaming state, an undigested round is left), and an effect may be executed in such a manner as to ask whether or not the big hit continues further. Then, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the big hit game is ended since all 15 rounds are internally ended, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, internally undivided rounds remain Therefore, the big hit game may continue (as if the opening of the big winning opening was additionally started with a bonus after ending the big hit of 15 times open).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as the big hit types. In this embodiment, although the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to For example, a 10R probability variation big hit to control 10 rounds of big hit games, a 7R probability variation big hit to control 7 rounds of big hit games, a 5R probability variation big hit to control 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, there are three cases of the big hit type being “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit”, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit state of 15 rounds and is shifted to a time saving state only after the end of the big hit state (see step S 167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time saving state is finished (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). In addition, even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  "Perhaps a big hit" is a big hit that controls to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a positive changing state after the big hit playing state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a positive changing state and also to a time saving state (Refer to steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  In addition, "suddenly positive variation big hit" is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is smaller than "normal big hit" or "positive variation big hit" (in this embodiment, 2 times opening for 0.1 seconds) It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. Also, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in "normal big hit" and "probably big hit", while the opening time of big winning opening per round is "in sudden definite changing big hit" It is extremely short, 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. And in this embodiment, it is transitioned to a definite change state after the termination of that sudden change big hit game state (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a definite change state and also to a short time state. Step S169, which will be described later). See S170). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  Note that the aspect of sudden positive jackpot is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the number of opening of the big winning opening may be 15 times (15 rounds) the same as that of the big hit or sudden odd variation big hit normally, and only the opening time of the big winning opening may be made extremely short to 0.1 second.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of a "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit gaming state by "a sudden definite big hit" Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, it is not necessary to provide a small hit, when it is comprised so that all the big hit types may be a definite variation big hit. In addition, when it is configured to provide a small hit if all the big hit type is a definite variation big hit, it is transitioned to a definite variation state (high probability state) and a sudden definite variation big hit without a short time state (high base state) It is preferable that the opening pattern of the big winning opening be made the same for the big hit and the small hit suddenly.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and the judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" (big hit type judgment value ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol that is variably displayed on the staging display device 9 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be generically referred to as a "special symbol specification command" (or a "symbol variation specification command"). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration display.

  The commands A 001 and A 002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, the start of the big hit game. In this embodiment, depending on the type of big hit, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command is used. Specifically, the jackpot start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit", and the small hit in the case of "suddenly big hit" or "small hit" The sudden definite big hit start specification command (A 002 (H)) is used. Although the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly transmits a fanfare designation command for a definite big hit start designation when it is a big hit suddenly, it does not send a fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set to the EXT data and transmitted for the special winning opening open designation command, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted after the special winning opening open command, a different special winning opening after opening specification command is transmitted every round. For example, when the first round in the big hit game is ended, the designated special command (A 201 (H)) is sent after the opening of the big winning opening which designates the round 1, and the tenth round in the big hit game is ended. Is sent after the special winning opening opening specifying the round 10, a specification command (A30A (H)).

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending a big hit game by “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”. The command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 2 specified command) for specifying the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit the ending designation command for the sudden change big hit termination specification suddenly in the case of the sudden change big hit, but not to send the ending specification command in the case of the small hit. It is also good.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (probable variation state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the definite variation state. The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize designation command) for designating that there has been a first start prize. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start prize designation command) for designating that there has been a second start prize. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first starting winning a prize designation command and the second starting winning a prize designation command may be generically referred to as "start winning a prize designation command".

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for specifying a total number (total pending storage number) which is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total number of pending storages. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (sum total storage number subtraction designation command) for designating 1 subtraction of the total number of suspension storage numbers. In this embodiment, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a sum holding memory number subtraction designation command when subtracting the sum holding memory number, but does not use the sum holding memory number subtraction designation command, When subtracting the total pending storage number, a combined total pending storage number specification command may be sent which specifies the total total pending storage number after subtraction.

  In this embodiment, as the command for designating the number of pending storages, the total pending storage number specifying command for designating the total pending storage number is transmitted. However, the first pending storage and the second pending storage May be configured to send a command specifying the number of pending storages that has increased. Specifically, when the first pending storage increases, a first pending storage number specifying command for designating the first pending storage number is transmitted, and when the second pending storage increases, the second pending storage number is specified. The second pending storage number specification command may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, a start winning designation command specifying which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has been started is transmitted as holding storage information, and the total number of pending holdings is stored. Although the case where the total reservation memory number designation | designated command which designates 、 is transmitted is shown, the presentation control command transmitted as reservation memory information is not restricted to what was shown by this embodiment. For example, when the number of pending storages increases, the pending storage number addition designation command (the first pending storage number addition designation command or the second pending storage number addition indicates that the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number has increased) The command for subtracting the number of pending storages, which indicates that the number of pending storages or the number of second pending storages has decreased when the number of pending storages decreases while sending the specified command (the first number of pending storages subtraction), or The second pending storage number subtraction designation command may be transmitted.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70 Do.

  For example, microcomputer 560 for game control designates the fluctuation pattern of the production design every time there is a starting winning and variable display of special symbols is started in first special symbol display 8a or second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31 via the relay substrate 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8a in response to the variation of the first special symbol. It can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the production symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the symbol display 8b, and the production display which performs the production with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the rendering components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the rendering control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIGS. 11 and 12 are flow charts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. FIG. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, if the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won in the first start winning opening 13 is on in the special symbol process processing, that is, the start to the first start winning opening 13 If the winning is occurring, the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (steps S311 and S312). In addition, when the second starting opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening 14 is on, that is, the starting winning for the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the hold memory buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. Data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 22), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control which transmits the special winning a prize opening opening designated command to the micro-computer 100 for production control, the execution time of the special winning a prize opening opening processing is set with the timer, internal state (special symbol process flag) step S306 Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed every round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also the processing to start the big hit game. Further, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data, the different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted every round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening open processing, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, while performing control which transmits the specified command after the opening in the big hit to the microcomputer 100 for production control, when all rounds are finished, internal state (special symbol process flag) the value which corresponds to step S307 (this value In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game, but when starting the first open in the small hit game, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit game It is also a process to start.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. In addition, when all opening is finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch passage process of step S312. FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage process of step S314.

  First, the first starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (A). In the first starting opening switch passage process executed when the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, 1) Check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter for counting the number of pending storages is 4) (step S1211A). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the combined hold storage number counter in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the order of winning for the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1214A).

  In this embodiment, when the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the first starting winning opening 13), data indicating "first" is set, When the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the second starting winning opening 14), data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first starting port switch 13 a is turned on in the storage-preferring specific information storage area (pending specific area). When the 2 start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating the "second". In this case, when there is no corresponding pending storage, 00 (H) is set in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area).

  FIG. 14A is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of the suspension storage specification information storage area (storage suspension area). As shown in FIG. 14 (A), in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total hold memory number counter is secured. Note that FIG. 14A shows an example in which the value of the combined pending storage number counter is five. As shown in FIG. 14A, in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total hold memory number counter is secured, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first start winning opening 13 or 2) Based on the winning on the start winning opening 14, data indicating that it is "first" or "second" is set in the winning order. Therefore, the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 is stored in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area). The hold specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 14B) (see FIG. Step S1215A). In the process of step S1215A, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 1st starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 14B is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of an area (pending storage buffer) for saving a random number and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 14B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1216A), and sets the value of the total hold memory number counter to the EXT data to specify the total hold memory number specification command Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1217A).

  Next, the second starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (B). In the second starting opening switch passage process executed when the second starting opening switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending opening). Whether or not the value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4) is confirmed (step S1211 B). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the area corresponding to the value of the total suspension storage number counter in the suspension storage specific information storage area (preservation specific area) (step S 1214 B).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 14B) (see FIG. Step S1215B). In the process of step S1215B, hardware R random number random number (big hit judgment random number), software hit random number for big hit type judgment random number (random 1), fluctuation pattern type judgment random number (random 2) and fluctuation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 2nd starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the time of the fluctuation start of the second special symbol You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S 1216 B) and sets the value of the total hold memory number counter to the EXT data to specify the total hold memory number specification command Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1217B).

  FIG.15 and FIG.16 is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in a special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, the CPU 56 determines whether or not a predetermined period (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the fluctuation display was finally stopped if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been sent yet. It confirms (step S51A). In addition, whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the last stop of the fluctuation display, for example, when the fluctuation display is ended (for example, in a special symbol stop process described later), a predetermined timer is set, and in step S51A This can be determined by confirming whether or not this predetermined timer has timed out. Finally, if the predetermined period has elapsed since the fluctuation display was stopped, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a customer waiting demo specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51B), and ends the processing. . For example, when transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command in step S51B, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, step S51A is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag is set. , S51B may be controlled not to be executed. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 14A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). If the first data set in the hold specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 selects the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "second" is set to a flag indicating whether the special symbol process process is being performed for the special symbol or the second special symbol is performed (step S53). If the first data set in the hold specific area is data indicating "first" (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  In this embodiment, the process of steps S52 to S54 is executed, and in this embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol according to the starting winning order in which the gaming balls have won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in accordance with the start winning combination in which the game balls have won in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Although the case where it is shown is shown, you may constitute so that priority may be given to change display of either one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. In this case, for example, when shifting to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second start winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15, and the second hold storage tends to be accumulated. The variation display of the special symbol may be executed with priority.

  In addition, since it becomes unnecessary to memorize | store a winning sequence when it is comprised so that priority is given to the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol as mentioned above, it is not necessary to store pending storage specific information shown in FIG. 14 (A). The area (pending specific area) becomes unnecessary.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and in the pending specific area and the first pending storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective saving areas in the pending specific area and the second pending storage buffer are shifted. Do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1. In addition, the CPU 56 sums up the values (the value indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the suspension specific area. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1 to 8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. Also, the CPU 56 sets only the time-shortening flag indicating that the time-shortening state is set, and performs control to transmit a time-shortening state background designation command when the probability change flag is not set. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if neither the positive variation flag nor the short time flag is set.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when starting to change the special symbol, micro control for effect control in the order of background specification command, fluctuation pattern command, display result specification command, total suspension storage number subtraction specification command for each timer interrupt It will be sent to the computer 100. Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, A total pending storage number subtraction specification command is sent. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the processing is performed on the first start winning opening 13, ie, processing on the first special symbol is indicated “first Data indicating "", or data indicating "second" indicating execution of processing for the second start winning opening 14, ie "second" indicating execution of processing for the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for the jackpot determination extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passing process and step S1215B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) with the jackpot judgment random number, and executes processing for deciding to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is a non-deterministic change state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When it is in the state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at the normal time. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. And, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. In addition, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not the small hit is made using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 8C. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (D). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“normal big hit”, “probable variation”) corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A "big hit" or "a sudden definite big hit" is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type which is extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passing process and step S1215B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer Read the random number and decide the big hit type. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the determination result of the big hit type, it decides the stop design of the special symbol “1”, “3”, “7” which becomes the big hit symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "big hit" is determined, the "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot fluctuation pattern type judgment table according to the jackpot type as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. (Step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S94). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether the time short flag indicating the short time state is set (step S95). Note that the time saving flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to a definite changing state or a time saving state, and is reset when the time saving state is ended. Specifically, when it is determined to be "normally a big hit", the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. In addition, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the fluctuation indication of specified number of times (100 times with this execution form) ends. The time saving flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs even before the predetermined number of times of variation display ends. In addition, when it is determined to be "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit", the probability flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the processing for ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability change flag.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination for normal time as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. A table is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type for determining the variation pattern type as any one of a plurality of types, and the variation pattern for loss at the time of shortening The type determination table is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state (in this embodiment, the time change state is always made when transitioning to the positive change state) Are also transferred (see steps S169 and S170), and if it is determined as Y in step S95, the CPU 56 may change the type of variation pattern type if there is a probability change state or if it is controlled to only the time saving state). As a table used to determine any one of a plurality of types, the time-outout variation pattern type determination table is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is normal and the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S95 to S99, the variation pattern type determination table for losing upon reduction Is selected. In addition, when the game state is a definite change state or a short time state, a time variation check pattern selection table for off time is selected. In this case, the variation pattern type for shortening variation may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100 described later, and if the variation pattern type for shortening variation is determined, the variation is performed in step S102. As a pattern, non-reach PA-1 and shortening fluctuation are determined (see FIG. 6). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, it is shown that the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state or the time saving state is different from the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories. However, a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the total number of pending storages is almost 0 (for example, 0 or 0 or 1). May not perform the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is approximately 0 or not, and if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0, for normal time use The variation pattern type determination table may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. The variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100. A pattern determination table is selected (step S101). Also, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserve storage buffer or the second reserve storage buffer), the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, it may be determined first whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, instead of suddenly determining the type of change pattern. And based on the determination result of whether to set it as a reach, the process of step S95-S100 may be performed, and you may make it determine a fluctuation pattern classification. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result, The variation pattern type may be determined.

  Further, when it is determined whether or not reach is determined by lottery processing using random numbers for reach determination, the number of reach may be determined according to the total number of pending storages (which may be the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number). A reach determination table with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not the reach probability is lowered as the number of pending storage increases.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command (see FIG. 9) according to any one of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit and removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set, if the type of the jackpot is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not whether it is "a certainty big hit" or not. . Then, when it is neither “normal big hit” nor “probable big hit” (ie, when it is “suddenly big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designated command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when the small hit flag is off, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the combined holding memory number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Note that whether or not the total storage reserve number subtraction specification command has already been transmitted, for example, that the total storage retention number subtraction specification command has been sent when transmitting the total storage storage number subtraction specification command in step S1122 described later. The sum holding storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the sum holding storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set may be checked in step S1121. Also, in this case, the set combined holding memory number subtraction designated command transmitted flag is reset in the special symbol stop processing and the big hit end processing described later when the variation display of the special symbol is finished or the big hit is finished. do it.

  Next, if the total suspension storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total suspension storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol determination specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, is a probability variation flag indicating that it is a definite variation state, a time shortening flag indicating that it is a time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the time reduction state Is reset (step S132), and control is performed to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is “normal jackpot” or “probable jackpot”, the jackpot start designation command (command A 001 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is a sudden definite big hit, a small hit / sudden positive big hit start specification command (command A 002 (H)) is transmitted. In addition, data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer) indicating whether the type of jackpot is “normally jackpot”, “probably outburst jackpot”, or “suddenly outright probability big hit” It is determined based on

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit". 2 times in the case of "probably odd big hit") is set in the big winning opening open number counter (step S135) . In addition, round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden odd change big hit, 0.1 second is set as a round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a positive change big hit, 29 seconds is set as a round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time saving state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time saving number counter by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command (command A 002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time per large winning opening in the small hit game is also set. Specifically, the same 0.1 second as the round time of the sudden big change big hit is set as the open time per one big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a "big hit" or "probably big hit" sends a big hit end designation command (command A 301 (H)), and if it is "suddenly big hit" a small hit / sudden positive big hit The end designation command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit to be finished this time is normally a big hit (step S166). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  Usually, if it is not a big hit (that is, if it is a definite variation big hit or sudden definite variation big hit), the CPU 56 sets a definite variation flag and shifts to a definite variation state (step S169) and sets a short time flag to shift to a short time condition (Step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or not (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data in the display control processing of step S22 Based on, the latest stop symbol will continue to be displayed stopped until the next variable display is started. In addition, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (ie, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation processing), for the special symbol variation display The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a gap between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, the display result designation command transmission process also varies. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by one.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the fact that the start flag is set, based on the fact that the end flag is set. The special symbol display control data may be set to stop and display the stop symbol.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S 701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected and the display control of the effect display device 9 (including the display control of the effect design) Run.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S 707).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory view showing one configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 9 and 10) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process which is executed every 4 ms. In this embodiment, although it is constituted so that production control command data may be outputted to main production control board 80 from main board 31 via relay board 77 using a parallel signal wire, it is limited to such composition. Alternatively, for example, the effect control command data may be output using a serial signal line.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 specification command to display result 5 specification command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is any of the big hit start designated commands (big hit start designated command, small hit / suddenly probability variation big hit start designated command) (step S621), the CPU 101 for production control receives the received big hit start designated command. A corresponding flag is set (step S622). In this case, for example, if the jackpot start designation command (command A 001 (H)) is received, the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, and the small hit / sudden oddity big hit start designation command (command A 002 (H)) If it is received, the small hit / sudden definite big hit start specification command reception flag is set.

  If the received effect control command is any of the big hit end specified commands (big hit end specified command, small hit / suddenly definite variation big hit end specified command) (step S623), the CPU 101 for production control receives the received big hit end specified command. The corresponding big hit end designated command reception flag is set (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S 628). For example, if the received effect control command is the first start winning specified command, the first start winning specified command reception flag is set, and if the received effect control command is the second start winning specified command, the second start winning specified command Set the reception flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control regarding variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process. In addition, even if it is configured to execute the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the second special symbol by another effect control process process. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which of the special symbols is displayed depending on which of the effect control process processing is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S803): The change of the effect pattern is stopped and control is performed to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the CPU for effect control 101 resets the fluctuation pattern command reception flag (step S812), and the value of the effect control process flag corresponds to the effect pattern fluctuation start process (step S801). The value is updated (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted also at the time of power failure recovery (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, it is normal time Since, based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command is received, it moves to the production design fluctuation start processing and starts the fluctuation indication of the production design, the fluctuation of the production design only by receiving the display result specification command without receiving the fluctuation pattern command The display does not start.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect pattern (stopped) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8001). That is, the processing of step S8001 is executed by the effect control CPU 101, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect pattern according to the variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU101 for production control is the chance eye design (for example, "223" and "445" etc.) as a temporary stop symbol of a pseudo run in step S8001. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined. In addition, it may be made to provide the false ream only symbol used only as a temporary stop symbol of a false gangmate instead of or in addition to a chance eye pattern as a temporary pause design of a false gangmate. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8001, the CPU for effect control 101 may determine whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the production symbol based only on the fluctuation pattern command. .

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 30, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops As the symbols, the combination of the effect symbols is determined by the even symbols (“2”, “4”, “6” or “8”) having the same three symbols. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probable big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of the rendering symbols aligned with the same odd symbols ("1", "3", "5" or "7").

  Also, if the received display result specification command indicates "Suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit" (if the received display result specification command is the display result 4 specification command or the display result 5 specification command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol.

  Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of effect symbols are associated with numerical values, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design. In addition, a symbol (in this embodiment, an odd symbol) that reminds of being in a definite variation state is also referred to as a definite variation symbol, and a symbol (in this embodiment, an even symbol) that reminds of not becoming a definite variation condition is not definite symbol It is also called.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the button effect at high speed variation, and determines an effect mode in the case of execution (step S8003a). When it is determined that the high-speed variation button effect is to be executed (Y in step S8003b), the effect control CPU 101 stores the data indicating the determined effect mode of the high-speed variation button effect (step S8003c). A high-speed variation button effect waiting flag indicating that it is determined to execute the variation button effect is set (step S8003d).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a button effect when reach is established, and determines an effect mode in the case of execution (step S8004a). When it is determined that the reach effect button effect is to be executed (Y in step S8004b), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the effect mode of the determined reach effect button effect (step S8004c), and the reach A reach establishment button effect waiting flag indicating that it is determined to execute the button effect when it is established is set (step S8004 d).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether or not to execute the button effect upon acceptance or failure, and determines an effect mode in the case of execution (step S8005a). Then, when it is determined that the button production for success or failure is to be executed (Y in step S8005b), the CPU 101 for effect control stores data indicating the effect mode of the determined button production for success or failure (step S8005c). A concurrency button effect waiting flag indicating that it is determined to execute the involuntary button effect is set (step S8005d). In this embodiment, if it is a fluctuation pattern including super reach, a button effect at the time of yes or no is always executed.

  Next, if the variation control pattern includes the super reach A (Y in step S8006a), the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the continuous hit button effect (step S8006b). Then, when it is determined to execute the continuous hit button effect (Y in step S8006c), the CPU 101 for effect control stores data indicating the effect mode of the determined continuous hit button effect (step S8006d), and executes the continuous hit button effect. A continuous hit button effect standby flag indicating that it is determined to be set is set (step S8006e). In this embodiment, if the variation pattern includes the super reach A, the continuous hit button effect is always executed.

  Next, if the variation control pattern includes the super reach B (Y in step S8007a), the effect control CPU 101 determines an effect mode of the long press button effect (step S8007b). When it is determined that the long press button effect is to be executed (Y in step S8007c), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect mode of the long press button effect (step S8007d), and the long press button A long press button effect waiting flag indicating that it is determined to execute the effect is set (step S8007e). In this embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation pattern including the super reach B, the long press button effect is always executed. Then, it transfers to step S8008.

  The button effect for high speed change, the button effect for reach establishment, the button effect for success or failure, the continuous hit button effect and the long press button effect are accompanied by the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the push button 120 and It is an effect executed based on the fact that a predetermined operation has been performed. Hereinafter, the high-speed variation button effect, the reach effect button effect, the disapproval button effect, the continuous hitting button effect, and the long press button effect are collectively referred to as "button effect". In the present embodiment, "promotion" is used not to mean that the player's operation is advanced, but to mean that the player's operation is prompted (solicited).

  In high-speed variation button production, reach formation button production and pass / fail button production, at the timing when the detection effective period corresponding to each button production is started, in production display 9, to prompt the operation of push button 120 (For example, a first operation prompting image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 and a second operation prompting image showing a predetermined character are displayed in any of a plurality of modes. A) to (D)). Then, based on the fact that the pressing operation by the push button 120 has been detected at least once during the detection valid period, the high-speed variation button effect image, the reach establishment button effect image or the hit or not button effect image (for example, a big hit and The image which suggests the possibility of becoming is displayed.

  Further, in the continuous hit button effect, at the timing when the corresponding detection effective period starts, in the effect display device 9, an operation promotion notification for prompting the continuous hit operation of the push button 120 is performed (see FIG. 34E). . Then, based on the fact that the pressing operation by the push button 120 has been detected a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the detection valid period (that is, based on the continuous hitting of the push button 120) For example, an image indicating the possibility of a big hit, in this example, a serif A image, a serif B image or a serif C image (see FIG. 33A) is displayed.

  Further, in the long press button effect, at the timing when the corresponding detection effective period starts, in the effect display device 9, an operation promotion notification for prompting the long press operation of the push button 120 is performed (FIG. 34 (F) reference). Then, based on the fact that the pressing operation by the push button 120 is continuously detected for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) during the detection valid period (that is, based on the long press of the push button 120); A long press button effect image (for example, an image indicating a possibility of becoming a big hit. In this example, an item A image, an item B image, or an item C image. See FIG. 33B) is displayed.

  Hereinafter, the high-speed variation button effect image, the reach establishment button effect image, the hit or not button effect image, the continuous hit button effect image, and the long press button effect image are collectively referred to as "button effect image". In addition, a first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 displayed as the operation promotion notification and a second operation promotion image showing predetermined characters are collectively referred to as “operation promotion image”.

  In this embodiment, any button effect is executed based on the operation performed by the push button 120. For example, when the button effect is performed at high speed, the operation performed by the push button 120 is performed. The button effect may be performed based on the fact that the operation by the trigger button 121 has been performed. That is, each button effect may be an effect that is executed when the different operation means is operated.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory view showing an example of execution timing of each button effect. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 31 (A) and 31 (B), the button effect at the time of high speed change is performed before the reach state is reached. Further, when reach is established, the button effect is executed after reaching the reach state. In addition, the button production at the time of success or failure is executed after the start of the production of the success or failure to ask whether or not the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31A, the continuous hit button effect is performed during execution of the super reach A and before the hit or not effect is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the long press button effect is performed during execution of the super reach B and before the hit or not effect is started.

  In this embodiment, the high-speed variation button effect and the reach effect button effect may be performed or not performed even if the super reach is performed, but the button effect is performed on success or failure. , It is performed whenever super reach is performed. Further, when the super reach A is executed, the continuous hit button effect is always executed, and when the super reach B is executed, the long press button effect is always executed. Note that the present invention is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and even when super reach is executed, the button effect may not be executed at a constant rate, and super reach A may be executed. Even in this case, the continuous hit button effect may not be executed at a constant rate, and even when the super reach B is executed, the long press button effect may not be executed at a constant rate.

  The timing to execute each button effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 31, and may be any timing during fluctuation. Also, for example, the timing to execute the button effect may be any timing during the big hit game. In the case of executing the button effect during the big hit game, it is suggested that it is controlled to a definite change state or time saving state after the increase of the round number or the big hit game based on the detection of the predetermined operation. Good.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the high-speed variation button effect setting table, the reach effect button effect setting table, and the hit / not button effect setting table. Also, FIG. 33 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the continuous hitting button effect setting table and the long press button effect setting table. Moreover, FIG. 34 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the operation promotion notification.

  In step S8003a, using the high-speed variation button effect setting table shown in FIG. 32A, it is determined whether or not the high-speed variation button effect is to be executed, and the effect mode in the case of execution ("No effect", " The first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are selected. In addition, deciding to "no effect" means to decide not to execute the button effect at high speed fluctuation, and any of the "first effect mode", the "second effect mode" and the "third effect mode" To determine whether to perform is to determine to perform the button effect at the time of high-speed variation in the effect mode of "first effect mode", "second effect mode" or "third effect mode".

  In the high-speed variation button effect setting table shown in FIG. 32A, the determination items (“no effect”, “first effect mode”, “second effect mode”, and “third effect mode”) for each variation pattern In the example shown in FIG. 32A, in order to simplify the description, the ratio of assigned judgment values is shown. For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for high-speed variation button effect setting, and determines it as a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 32A, the numerical values corresponding to the determination items (“no effect”, “first effect mode”, “second effect mode” and “third effect mode”) in each variation pattern are , Indicates the percentage (%) that each decision item is selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33A, in the case of a variation pattern not including super reach (for example, in the case of variation patterns other than super PA 3-1 to PA 3-4 and super PB 3-1 to PB 3 4 shown in FIG. Is determined not to execute the high-speed variation button effect at a rate of 90%, and it is determined to perform the high-speed variation button effect at the “first effect mode” at a 10% rate. In addition, in the case of a super reach loss (for example, in the case of the variation pattern of super PA 3-1 to PA 3-2 or super PB 3-1 to PB 3-2 shown in FIG. 6), the button for high-speed variation is 30%. It is decided not to execute the effect, it is decided to carry out the high-speed fluctuation button effect in the “first effect mode” at a ratio of 40%, and the high-speed fluctuation button effect at the ratio 25% in the “second effect mode” It is determined to be executed, and it is determined that the button effect at high speed fluctuation is performed in the “third effect mode” at a rate of 5%. In addition, in the case of per super reach (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of super PA3-3-3 or super PB 3-3-PB 3-4 shown in FIG. It is decided not to execute the effect, and it is decided to execute the high-speed fluctuation button effect in the “first effect mode” at a ratio of 20%, and the high-speed fluctuation button effect at the 50% ratio in the “second effect mode” It is determined to be executed, and it is determined that the button effect at high speed fluctuation is performed in the “third effect mode” at a rate of 10%.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the high-speed variation button effect setting table shown in FIG. 32 (A), the reach establishment button effect setting table shown in FIG. 32 (B) and the hit / not shown in FIG. 32 (C). Determination values are actually assigned to the hour button effect setting table, the continuous hitting button effect setting table shown in FIG. 33A, and the long press button effect setting table shown in FIG. The ratio of the judgment value assigned for the conversion is shown. Also, in steps S8004a, S8005a, S8006b, and S8007b in which those tables are used, the CPU 101 for effect control, for example, extracts a random number, and the determination value that matches the extracted random number is the same as in S8003a. Determine what has been assigned.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the button effect at high speed fluctuation in the effect mode of the “first effect mode”, the “second effect mode” or the “third effect mode”. . In the high-speed variation button effect, in any of the effect modes, a small size small button image (hereinafter referred to as the first operation promotion) of the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 as the operation promotion notification. An image (also referred to as “small”) is displayed (see the first operation prompting image (small) 201 a in FIG. 34A). In addition, when the operation is detected within the detection effective period, in the “first effect mode”, the first high-speed fluctuation button effect image showing the characters “...” Is displayed, and the “second effect mode” is displayed. Then, the second high-speed variation button effect image indicating the character “?” Is displayed, and the third high-speed variation button effect image indicating the character “!” Is displayed in the “third effect mode”. Hereinafter, the first high-speed variation button effect image, the second high-speed variation button effect image, and the third high-speed variation button effect image may be collectively referred to as “high-speed variation button effect image”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the button effect at reach establishment in the effect mode of the “first effect mode”, the “second effect mode” or the “third effect mode”. It is. In reach effect when button effect, in any effect mode, medium size medium button image (hereinafter referred to as the first operation promotion of the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 as the operation promotion notification The image (also referred to as “middle”) is displayed (see the first operation promotion image (middle) 201 b in FIG. 34B). In addition, when the operation is detected within the detection effective period, the first reach formation button effect image indicating the character of “chance!” Is displayed in the “first effect mode”, and in the “second effect mode”. The second reach formation button effect image showing the character of “Opportunity!” Is displayed, and in the “third effect mode”, the third reach formation button effect image showing the character of “Extreme heat!” Is displayed. Hereinafter, the first reach establishment button effect image, the second reach establishment button effect image, and the third reach establishment button effect image may be collectively referred to as “reach establishment button effect image”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 32C, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the button presentation at hit or not in the presentation mode of the “first presentation mode”, the “second presentation mode” or the “third presentation mode”. It is. In the "first effect mode" of the button effect at the time of refusal, a middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)) is displayed as the operation promotion notification (refer to FIG. 34 (B)), and the "second effect mode" Then, as the operation promotion notification, the large-size large button image (hereinafter also referred to as “first operation promotion image (large)”) of the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 and the predetermined character The second operation prompting image (pressing) showing the character of "press" in the second operation prompting image showing the is displayed (the first operation prompting image (large) 201c of FIG. 34 (C), the second operation prompting) In the image (press) 202a) and the “third effect mode”, as the operation prompting notification, “large button image (first operation prompting image (large))” and “second operation prompting image showing a predetermined character” The second operation promotion image (one strike) showing the character of one strike is displayed The (first operation promoting image (large) 201c in FIG. 34 (D), the second operating promoting image (blow) see 202b). In addition, when the operation is detected within the detection effective period, the button effect image at the time of yes or no according to the display result of the variable display is displayed. In this example, when the display result is a release, the first hit / not turned button effect image (see the first hit / turned button effect image 204a in FIG. 42 (D1)) indicating the character of "loss ..." is displayed. When the display result is a big hit, a second hit or not button effect image (see the second hit or not button effect image 204b of FIG. 42 (D2)) indicating the character of "winning!" Is displayed . Hereinafter, the first on-off button effect image and the second on-off button effect image may be collectively referred to as a “on-off button effect image”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33A, in this embodiment, the continuous hitting button effect can be executed in the effect mode of the “first effect mode”, the “second effect mode” or the “third effect mode”. . In the continuous hit button effect, in any of the effect modes, "continuous hit" of the small button image (first operation prompt image (small)) and the second operation prompt image showing a predetermined character as the operation prompting notification A second operation prompting image (continuous hitting) indicating the character of is displayed (see the first operation prompting image (small) 201a and the second operation prompting image (continuous hit) 202c in FIG. 34E). Further, when the continuous hitting operation is detected within the detection effective period, a serif A image (also referred to as a "first continuous hitting button effect image") is displayed in the "first effect mode", and in the "second effect mode" A dialogue B image (also referred to as a "second consecutive hit button effect image") is displayed, and in the "third effect mode", a serif C image (also referred to as a "third consecutive hit button effect image") is displayed. Hereinafter, the first double hit button effect image, the second double hit button effect image, and the third double hit button effect image may be collectively referred to as a “double hit button effect image”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33B, in this embodiment, the long press button effect can be executed in the effect mode of the “first effect mode”, the “second effect mode” or the “third effect mode”. is there. In the long-press button effect, in any of the effect modes, as the operation promotion notification, the “long” of the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and the second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character The second operation prompting image (long press) indicating the character of "press" is displayed (see the first operation prompting image (small) 201a and the second operation prompting image (long press) 202d in FIG. 34F). Further, when the long press operation is detected within the detection effective period, an item A image (also referred to as a “first long press button effect image”) is displayed in the “first effect mode”, and the “second effect mode” is displayed. The item B image (also referred to as “second long press button effect image”) is displayed, and the item C image (also referred to as “third long press button effect image”) is displayed in the “third effect mode”. Hereinafter, the first long press button effect image, the second long press button effect image, and the third long press button effect image may be collectively referred to as “long press button effect image”.

  What is characteristic in each button effect setting table shown in FIGS. 32A to 32C is that the variation pattern including super reach is more than the variation pattern not including super reach, and the display result is not If the player is a big hit, the ratio determined to be the "first effect mode", the "second effect mode" or the "third effect mode" is high, and the ratio determined to be "no effect" is determined to be low. The value is to be set. Furthermore, the ratio in which the display result is determined to be the “second effect mode” as the “second effect mode” than the “first effect mode” and the “third effect mode” as the “second effect mode” is higher when the big hit is more than the release. The judgment value is set to be By providing such a feature, the second effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode are more effective when the effect is executed than when the effect is not executed. "When the third effect mode" is executed rather than the "mode", it is possible to increase the ratio in which the variation pattern of the advantageous design pattern (for example, develop into super reach) is higher, or the display result becomes a big hit The proportion can be increased. That is, the “third effect mode” is a effect mode having a higher degree of expectation than the “first effect mode” and the “second effect mode” and the “second effect mode”. Therefore, while being able to give the player a sense of expectation for the button effect at the time of high speed change, the button effect at the time of reach establishment, and the button effect at the time of passing, it is possible to give an expectation It can be noticed.

  Moreover, in the continuous hitting button effect setting table and the long press button effect setting table shown in FIGS. 33 (A) to (B), the characteristic that the display result is the big hit rather than the removal is the “first effect mode”. More specifically, the determination value is set such that the proportion determined as the “third effect mode” is higher than the “second effect mode” or the “second effect mode”. By having such a feature, the display when the second effect mode is executed rather than the first effect mode, and the third effect mode is executed rather than the second effect mode is displayed. The rate at which the result is a big hit can be increased. That is, the “third effect mode” is a effect mode having a higher degree of expectation than the “first effect mode” and the “second effect mode” and the “second effect mode”. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which effect mode the continuous hit button effect and the long press button effect are executed.

  In this embodiment, a first pattern for displaying only the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120, and a second pattern for displaying the first operation promotion image and a second operation promotion image showing predetermined characters. And the operation promotion notification can be executed. Specifically, in the first effect mode of the hit or not button presentation, the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern, and in the second and third effect modes, the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern. As described above, in this embodiment, the second presentation mode and the third presentation mode are configured to have a higher degree of expectation than the first presentation mode. Therefore, the degree of expectation is higher when the operation promotion notification is performed in the second pattern more than the first pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which pattern the operation promotion notification is performed. In addition, in the operation prompting notification by the first pattern, only the first operation prompting image is displayed, and in the operation prompting notification by the second pattern, the first operation prompting image and the second operation prompting image are displayed, and thus displayed. When the number of images increases, the degree of expectation becomes high, and the degree of expectation can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The present invention is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, and the operation promotion notification of the first pattern may be configured to have a higher degree of expectation than the operation promotion notification of the second pattern.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. Specifically, any of the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)), the middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)) and the large button image (first operation promotion image (large)) The middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)) can be displayed in the first effect mode of the button effect for success or failure, and the large button can be displayed in the second effect mode and the third effect mode. An image (first operation prompting image (large)) is displayed. Then, the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the first operation prompting image is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give an interest to the aspect of the first operation promotion image, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the second operation prompting image showing a predetermined character can also be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. Specifically, the second operation promotion image (press) is displayed in the second effect mode of the hit or not button presentation, and the second operation promotion image (one hit) is displayed in the third effect mode. Then, the degree of expectation also differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the second operation prompting image is displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to give an interest to the aspect of the second operation promotion image, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the first operation promotion image and the second promotion image can be displayed by any of a plurality of modes, the operation promotion notification by the second pattern is executed by any of a plurality of modes. It can be said that it can be done. Specifically, in the second effect mode of the button effect for success or failure, the operation promotion by the second pattern is performed by displaying the large button image (first operation promotion image (large)) and the second operation promotion image (press). The notification is performed, and in the third effect mode, the operation promotion notification by the second pattern is performed by displaying the large button image (first operation promotion image (large)) and the second operation promotion image (one blow). Then, the degree of expectation differs depending on which second pattern of the plurality of modes the operation promotion notification has been performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to give an interest to which mode the operation promotion notification by the second pattern is performed, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation promotion notification is performed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at different rates according to the timing when the button effect is performed (that is, the timing when the operation promotion notification is performed). Is configured. Specifically, at the timing when the high speed variation button effect is executed and the timing when the reach effect button effect is executed, the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern at a rate of 100%, and the button effect when it is disapproval In the timing at which is performed, when the display result is a loss, the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern (the second pattern at a ratio of 30%) at a rate of 70%, and the display result is a big hit The operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern (the second pattern at the ratio of 65%) at the ratio of 35%. Then, in this embodiment, as the operation promotion notification performed at a later timing, the proportion performed by the second pattern is higher, and the expectation degree is higher. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to give an interest to the timing at which the operation promotion notification is performed, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect. In addition, it is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 32, but at the timing when the button effect at the time of high speed fluctuation button effect or reach establishment is performed, the operation promotion notification is executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern. It may be configured.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the timing performed for every button production is defined, for example, at a plurality of timings during the high speed fluctuation of the production design, the high speed fluctuation button production can be executed, or the reach establishment If it is possible to execute button effect at reach establishment at a plurality of subsequent timings, the first pattern and the second pattern may be different at different rates depending on the timing at which the button effect at high speed variation is performed or button effect is achieved at reach effect. The operation promotion notification may be performed by any of the above. In addition, even in such a configuration, the degree of expectation is different depending on whether the operation promotion notification is performed depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern (for example, the ratio of the display result becoming a big hit is different) You may

  Further, in this embodiment, the high-speed variation button presentation, the reach establishment button presentation, and the hit / off button presentation are performed based on the pressing operation of the push button 120 being performed once during the detection effective period. However, the continuous hit button effect is executed based on the continuous hit operation of the push button 120 performed during the detection valid period, and the long press button effect performs the long press operation of the push button 120 during the detection valid period. It is executed on the basis of Therefore, in the case of the continuous hitting button effect, as the operation prompting notification, the second operation prompting image (continuous hitting) for prompting the continuous hitting operation is displayed together with the first operation prompting image, and in the case of the long press button effect, the first operation prompting as the operation prompting notification A second operation prompting image (long press) for prompting a long press operation is displayed together with the operation prompting image. By this configuration, it is possible to show the player the necessary operations in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In this embodiment, one type of operation promotion notification is provided for each of the continuous hit button effect and the long press button effect, but a plurality of modes may be provided. For example, the operation promotion notification of the continuous hitting button effect may be executable by the mode of displaying the first operation promoting image (middle) and the second operation promoting image (continuous hitting). Also in this case, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the mode of the operation promotion notification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 31, it is determined whether or not to execute each button effect by dividing the variation pattern into three types: variation patterns without super reach, variation patterns with super reach deviation, and variation patterns with super reach. Although the presentation aspect in the case of performing was determined, how to divide a fluctuation pattern is not restricted to this. For example, among the variation patterns not including super reach, a variation pattern not including reach, a variation pattern including normal reach, and a variation pattern including normal reach with which the display result is a hit, a category such as a loss is added Alternatively, whether or not each button effect is to be executed may be determined. In addition, with regard to fluctuation patterns including super reach, depending on the type of super reach (in this example, super reach A or super reach B in this example), it is determined whether or not to execute each button effect, the effect mode in the case of execution You may do it.

  For example, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 31 (B), and even if it is a variation pattern not including super reach, each variation can be performed at a constant rate as long as it is a variation pattern including normal reach.

  In the example shown in FIG. 32, whether the button presentation is performed or not is divided into two types, that is, Super Reach A gap (Super Reach B gap) and Super Reach A (per Super Reach B). Although the presentation mode has been determined, as described above, the method of dividing the fluctuation pattern is not limited to this. That is, even in the case of variation patterns other than Super Reach A or Super Reach B, continuous hit button effects and long press button effects may be made executable.

  Further, not only the example shown in FIG. 31 (C) but also in the case of a super reach or a super reach, it is possible not to execute the to-be-performed button effect at a constant rate. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 32 (A), the continuous hit button effect may not be executed at a constant rate even in the case of a super reach A gap or a super reach A hit. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 32 (B), the long press button effect may not be executed at a constant rate even in the case of the super reach B being out of place or in the case of the super reach B.

  In this embodiment, the operation of the player is detected by detecting whether the operation of the push button 120 is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the stick controller 122 may be detected. The action of the player may be detected by a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor. Further, in this case, the present invention is not limited to the mode of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 34. For example, an image imitating the appearance of the stick controller 122 and an image showing the characters “close” are displayed or a hand is held over a sensor The operation promotion notification may be performed by displaying an image imitating a state and an image showing a character of "Holding hand". Further, in this case, the operation of the player serving as an opportunity to execute the effect may be different depending on the degree of expectation. For example, the effect to be performed based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 122 at the time of acceptance or rejection is such that the expectation is higher than the effect to be performed based on the detection of the operation of the push button 120. May be

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the example of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 34, but, for example, with the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) or middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)) An operation prompting may be performed to display a second operation prompting image indicating a character such as "a blow". In this case, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the combination of the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image. For example, the operation promotion notification in which the first operation promotion image (small) and the second operation promotion image (press) are displayed, rather than the operation promotion notification in which only the first operation promotion image (small) is displayed, Furthermore, the first operation prompting image (small) and the second operation prompting image (one strike) are displayed rather than the operation prompting notification in which the first operation prompting image (small) and the second operation prompting image (pressing) are displayed. The expectation of the operation promotion notification may be higher.

  In addition, for example, when the operation promotion notification is performed in a specific mode, the jackpot may be determined. Specifically, when a specific first operation promotion image (for example, an image imitating a gold push button 120) is displayed, or a specific second operation promotion image (for example, “PUSH!” Is shown. If an image is displayed, it may be determined that a big hit has been made. In addition, when it is displayed alone, it does not become the big hit decision, but when it is displayed in combination it is possible to do the operation promotion information where the big hit decision becomes. Specifically, when only the small button image (the first operation promotion image (small)) is displayed, the big hit is not determined, but the small button image (the first operation promotion image (small)) and the second operation If a promotion image (one strike) is displayed (if a combination with a high degree of rarity is displayed), a big hit may be determined.

  Moreover, even if it is the operation promotion alerting | reporting of the same aspect, an expectation degree may be made to differ by the timing performed. Specifically, the operation prompting for displaying the small button image (first operation prompting image (small)) has a low degree of expectation if performed at high speed fluctuation, but the degree of expectation becomes high if performed at false acceptance (( For example, it may be determined to be a big hit).

  In step S8008 of the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step S8008), and starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8009).

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory view of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect pattern. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 35 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In this embodiment, since each button effect is realized by executing a predetermined process (for example, the process of steps S8106 to S8175 described later) in the effect symbol variation process, any button effect is produced. In step S8008, a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of whether or not to execute. Scenario data (corresponding to a process table in this example) corresponding to the presence or absence of each button effect may be stored in advance, and each button effect may be realized by executing processing based on the data. However, with the configuration of this embodiment, each button effect can be realized while suppressing an increase in the amount of data.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case where each button effect can be executed as the effect during the change will be described. For example, step-up notice effect, mini character notice effect, movable object notice effect, effect blade role notice effect It may be determined whether or not to execute, and the advance notice effect may be performed based on the determination result. If it is decided to execute such a notice effect, a process table corresponding to the notice effect may be selected in step S8008. That is, even if scenario data (corresponding to a process table in this example) corresponding to the presence or absence of each notice effect is stored in advance and the process is executed based on those data, the notice effect can be realized. Good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect device (effect display device 9 as a effect component, effect component as a effect component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8010). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. In addition, in order to output sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8011).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802) (step S8012).

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls variable display of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  FIG. 36 to FIG. 40 are flowcharts showing the process during the effect symbol variation (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S8105).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the high-speed variation button production effect flag indicating that the high-speed variation button production is in a detection effective period is set (step S8106). If the high-speed variation button effect effective flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8113.

  If the high-speed variation button effect creation flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the high-speed variation button effect waiting flag is set (step S8107). If the high-speed variation button effect waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  When the high-speed variation button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the high-speed variation button effect (that is, the high-speed variation button effect detection effective period start timing). It confirms (step S8108). If it is not the start timing of the button effect during high speed fluctuation, the process shifts to step S8120.

  If it is the start timing of the high-speed variation button effect, that is, if the high-speed variation button effect detection effective period start timing, the effect control CPU 101 resets the high-speed variation button effect standby flag (step S8109) At the same time, the high speed variation button effect effective flag is set (step 8110). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display a small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) as an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the push button 120 and the remaining period of the detection valid period. Control for displaying the remaining effective period image indicating (steps S8111 and S8112). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8113.

  In this embodiment, depending on the remaining period of the detection effective period, the ratio of the indication area in the meter display area is different and the remaining effective period image is updated and displayed to indicate the remaining period of the detection effective period. It is configured. That is, the meter display area in the remaining effective period image indicates the entire detection effective period, and the indication region indicates the remaining period of the detection effective period. Specifically, when the detection effective period starts, the remaining effective period image in which the indication area occupies the entire area of the meter display area (for example, the remaining effective period image 203 shown in FIG. A remaining effective period image (for example, the remaining effective period shown in FIG. 43 (B1)) in which the proportion of the indication region to the meter display region decreases according to the decrease in the remaining period of the detection effective period. When the image 203) is displayed and the detection effective period ends (or when a predetermined operation is detected), the remaining effective period image in which the ratio of the indication area to the meter display area is 0 (for example, FIG. The remaining effective period image 203) shown in C1) is displayed. Therefore, the player can grasp the remaining period of the detection effective period by confirming the state of the remaining effective period image. In this embodiment, the remaining effective period image (for example, the remaining effective period image 203 shown in FIG. 43 (C1)) in which the ratio of the indication region to the meter display region is 0 is also referred to as the effective period end image. By displaying the valid period end image, notification of the end of the detection valid period is performed to notify that the detection valid period has ended.

  In step S8113, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the operation of the push button 120 is detected (step S8113). When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect display variation start processing in the effect display device 9 and performs high-speed change according to the stored effect mode of the high-speed change button effect Control is performed to display a button effect image at fluctuation (for example, “...,“? ”Or“! ”, See FIG. 32A) (step S 8114). Further, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed remaining effective period image (step S8114a).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed operation promotion image in the effect display device 9 (step S8115). Further, the effect control CPU 101, in the effect display device 9, as a notification of the end of the detection effective period notifying that the detection effective period has ended, the effective period end image (for example, the indication area shown in FIG. 43 (C1) is a meter The remaining effective period image 203) whose proportion in the display area is 0 is displayed (step S8116). Then, the CPU for effect control 101 resets the button effect effective flag at high speed fluctuation (step S8117). In addition, the button effect image at the time of high speed variation and the effective period end image are erased after being displayed for a predetermined period. For example, when displaying a high-speed variation button effect image or a valid period end image, a timer is set, and when a predetermined period is counted by the timer, control is performed to delete the high-speed variation button effect image or valid period end image Is realized by

  Further, in step S8113, when the operation of the push button 120 is not detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the high-speed variation button effect end timing (that is, the high-speed variation button effect detection valid period end timing). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S8118). Then, if it is the end timing of the button effect at the time of high speed fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S8115. If the high-speed variation button effect termination timing is not reached, the CPU for effect control 101 updates the remaining validity period image according to the remaining duration of the detection validity period (step S8119). For example, the remaining effective period image is displayed in which the proportion of the indication area in the meter display area is reduced according to the decrease of the remaining period (see FIG. 43 (B1)). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  In step S8120, the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether or not the reach effect button effect enable flag indicating that the reach effect is on during the button effect detection period is set (step S8120). If the reach formation button effect effective flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8127.

  If the reach formation button production effective flag is not set, the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether the reach formation button production standby flag is set (step S8121). If the reach formation button effect waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8134.

  When the reach formation button effect waiting flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the button effect when the reach is established (that is, the detection validity period start timing of the button effect when the reach formation is made). It confirms (step S8122). If it is not the start timing of the button effect at the time of reach establishment, the process proceeds to step S8134.

  If it is the start timing of the button effect when reach is established, that is, when the detection effective period start timing of the button effect when reach is established, the CPU 101 for effect control resets the button effect standby flag when reach is established (step S 8123) At the same time, when reach is established, the button effect effective flag is set (step 8124). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display a middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)) and display a remaining effective period image as an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the push button 120. Control is performed (steps S8125 and S8126). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8127.

  In step S8127, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the operation of the push button 120 has been detected (step S8127). When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect display variation start processing in the effect display device 9 and reaches according to the effect mode of the reach effect when the reach effect is established. Control is performed to display a button effect image (for example, “chance!”, “Good opportunity!” Or “excessive heat!”, See FIG. 32B) when established (step S8128). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed remaining effective period image in the effect display device 9 (step S8128a).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed operation promotion image in the effect display device 9 (step S8129). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended (step S8130). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the reach effect button effect enable flag (step S8131). In addition, the button effect at the time of reach establishment and the effective period end image are erased after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  Further, in step S8127, when the operation of the push button 120 is not detected, the effect control CPU 101 is the end timing of the button effect when the reach is established (that is, the detection effective period end timing of the button effect when the reach is realized). Whether or not it is confirmed (step S8132). If it is the end timing of the button effect when reach is established, the process proceeds to step S8129. If the reach formation button achievement end timing is not reached, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image according to the remaining period of the detection effective period (step S8133). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8134.

  In step S8134, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the button activity effect flag for informing is set, which indicates that the detection period of button effect in the event of acceptance is in effect (step S8134). If the yes or no button effect valid flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8141.

  If the yes or no button effect valid flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the yes or no button effect standby flag is set (step S8135). If the yes or no button effect waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8148.

  If the in-and-off button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the in-out button effect (that is, the detection effective period start timing of the in-out button effect). It confirms (step S8136). If it is not the start timing of the button effect at the time of yes or no, the process proceeds to step S8148.

  If it is the start timing of the button production at the success or failure, that is, the start timing of the detection effective period of the button production at the success or failure, the CPU 101 for production control resets the button production standby flag for success or failure (step S8137). At the same time, the button production effective flag for success or failure is set (step 8138). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display the operation promotion image according to the mode in which the operation promotion image has been determined as the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the push button 120 (for example, the middle button image (first operation promotion image The large button image (first operation prompting image (large)) and the second operation prompting image (pressing) are displayed, or the large button image (first operation prompting image (large)) and the first 2) Control is performed to display the remaining effective period image together with the operation prompting image (one shot) (steps S8139 and S8140). Then, it transfers to step S8141.

  In step S8141, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation of the push button 120 has been detected (step S8141). When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect display device 9 in the effect symbol variation start processing, and according to the stored effect mode of the button effect at the time of pass / fail, The button effect image (for example, the first hit or not button effect image 204a indicating the character of "defeated ...") or the second hit or button effect image 204b indicating the character "wins!" , (D2) is displayed (step S8142). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed remaining effective period image in the effect display device 9 (step S8142a). Note that, instead of or in addition to the example described in this embodiment, in the process of step S8142, in the case of a big hit, a predetermined movable combination is operated, and in the case of separation, a predetermined movable combination You may make it not operate a thing. Also, for example, in the case of a big hit (or in the case of a definite variation big hit), a predetermined movable part is operated according to the first pattern, and in the case of an omission (or a normal big hit) The accessory may be operated according to a second pattern different from the first pattern.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed operation promotion image in the effect display device 9 (step S8143). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended (step S8144). Then, the CPU for effect control 101 resets the button production effective flag at the time of yes or no (step S8145). In addition, the button effect image for success or failure and the valid period end image are deleted after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  In step S8141, when the operation of the push button 120 is not detected, the CPU for effect control 101 determines that the end timing of the button effect for winning or losing (that is, the detection expiration period end timing for the button effect for winning or not). Whether or not it is confirmed (step S8146). And if it is the completion | finish timing of button production at the time of yes or no, it will transfer to step S8143. In addition, if it is not the end timing of the button presentation at the time of success or failure, the CPU for effect control 101 updates the remaining effective period image according to the remaining period of the detection effective period (step S8147). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8148.

  In step S8148, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the continuous hit button effect enable flag indicating that the continuous hit button effect detection is in effect is set (step S8148). If the consecutive hit button effect enable flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8155.

  If the continuous hit button effect valid flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the continuous hit button effect standby flag is set (step S8149). If the continuous hit button effect standby flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8162.

  If the continuous hit button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous hit button effect (that is, the detection valid period start timing of the continuous hit button effect) (step S8150) . If it is not the start timing of the continuous hit button effect, the process proceeds to step S8162.

  If it is the start timing of the continuous hit button effect, that is, if the detection valid period start timing of the continuous hit button effect, the effect control CPU 101 resets the continuous hit button effect standby flag (step S8151) and the continuous hit button effect is effective. The flag is set (step 8152). In addition, the effect control CPU 101, in the effect display device 9, as an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the push button 120, a small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and a second operation promotion image (continuous hitting). And displaying the remaining effective period image (steps S8153 and S8154). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8155.

  In step S8155, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous hitting operation of the push button 120 has been detected (step S8155). When the continuous hit operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect symbol variation start process in the effect display device 9 and the continuous hit button according to the stored effect mode of the continuous hit button effect. Control is performed to display an effect image (for example, a dialogue A image, a dialogue B image or a dialogue C image; see FIG. 33A) (step S8156). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed remaining effective period image in the effect display device 9 (step S 8156 a).

  In step S8155, the determination as to whether or not the continuous hitting operation of the push button 120 is detected is performed, for example, by confirming whether or not the operation detection signal has been received a predetermined number of times from the push sensor 124 within a predetermined period. . In addition, in the effect display device 9, meter display or the like may be performed according to the number of operations so that the number of times the push button 120 is operated can be recognized within the detection valid period of the continuous hit button effect. With this configuration, the meter value increases with each operation, so that the player can feel the effect of the continuous hitting operation, and can improve the rendering effect. Further, in the configuration in which the meter display is performed, for example, a lottery may be performed each time the push button 120 is operated, and the meter value may be increased when winning (for example, winning at a ratio of 1/10). Also, for example, it may be configured such that a big hit is determined when the meter value reaches the maximum value as a result of the continuous hitting operation. In this case, when the display result is not a big hit, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90% of the maximum value), the meter value is not increased even if the pressing operation is performed, or the lottery is not won. It should be configured to It is desirable to provide a case where the meter value does not reach the maximum value even when the display result is a big hit. In this way, even when the meter value does not reach the maximum value, the possibility of a big hit remains, and it is possible to enhance interest. In addition, the meter display by the continuous hit button effect may be utilized for the hit or not effect or the hit or not button effect to be performed after the continuous hit button effect. For example, it may be made to execute a win-brick effect incorporating a meter display by a continuous hit button effect or a win-benefit button effect, or if there are more meter values, a win-brick effect or a win-brick effect with higher expectation or rarity. A button effect may be performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to enhance the relevance between the effects, and to improve the effects of the effects.

  In this embodiment, the continuous hit button effect is configured such that the continuous hit button effect image is displayed when the push button 120 is operated a predetermined number of times within the detection effective period, for example, the detection effective period A lottery may be performed each time the push button 120 is operated, and when the lottery is won (for example, won at a ratio of 1/100), the consecutive hit button effect image may be displayed. That is, it may be an effect that it is advantageous to hit the push button 120 continuously in order to increase the number of times of drawing and to increase the possibility of winning.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed operation promotion image in the effect display device 9 (step S8157). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended (step S8158). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the continuous hit button effect valid flag (step S8159). The continuous hit button effect image and the effective period end image are erased after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  In step S8155, if the continuous hit operation of the push button 120 is not detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the end timing of the continuous hit button effect (that is, the detection valid period end timing of the continuous hit button effect) (Step S8160). And if it is the completion | finish timing of continuous hit button production, it will transfer to step S8157. Also, if it is not the end timing of the continuous hit button effect, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image according to the remaining period of the detection effective period (step S8161). Then, it transfers to step S8162.

  In step S8162, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the long press button effect valid flag indicating that the detection of the long press button effect is in progress is set (step S8162). If the long press button effect valid flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8169.

  If the long press button effect valid flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the long press button effect standby flag is set (step S8163). If the long press button effect waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8176.

  When the long press button effect standby flag is set, the CPU 101 for production control checks whether or not it is the start timing of the long press button effect (that is, the detection valid period start timing of the long press button effect) ( Step S8164). If it is not the start timing of the long press button effect, the process proceeds to step S8176.

  If it is the start timing of the long press button effect, that is, if it is the detection valid period start timing of the long press button effect, the CPU 101 for production control resets the long press button effect standby flag (step S8165) and the long A push button effect valid flag is set (step 8166). In addition, in the effect display device 9, the effect control CPU 101 performs a small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and a second operation promotion image (long press) as an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the push button 120. And displaying the remaining effective period image (steps S8167 and S8168). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8169.

  In step S8169, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the long press operation on the push button 120 is detected (step S8169). When the long press operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect symbol variation start processing in the effect display device 9 according to the effect mode of the long press button effect stored and stored. Control is performed to display a long press button effect image (for example, an item A image, an item B image, or an item C image; see FIG. 33B) (step S8170). Further, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed remaining effective period image (step S8170a).

  In step S8169, it is determined whether or not the long press operation of the push button 120 is detected, for example, continues to receive an operation detection signal from the push sensor 124 for a predetermined period (shorter than the detection valid period) It is done by confirming whether or not. For example, it is determined whether or not the long press operation of the push button 120 is detected, whether or not the total of the periods pressed in the detection valid period has reached a predetermined period (shorter than the detection valid period) It may be performed by confirming the In addition, the effect display device 9 performs meter display or the like according to the period of the long press operation so that the period when the push button 120 is operated for a long press can be recognized within the detection effective period of the long press button effect. You may do so. For example, if a long press operation is performed for 0.5 seconds, meter display is performed so that the meter value for 10% of the full scale increases. With this configuration, when the long press operation is continued, the meter value increases, so that the player can realize the effect of the long press operation, and can improve the rendering effect. For example, in the second half of the detection effective period, if a long press operation is performed for 0.5 seconds, a meter value corresponding to 20% of the entire scale may be increased in the meter display. If done for 2 seconds, the meter value for 10% of the full scale may be increased in the meter display. Thus, the meter value can be easily increased within the detection valid period by increasing the pace of increase of the meter value in the specific period of the detection valid period. Also, for example, it may be configured such that a big hit is determined when the meter value reaches the maximum value as a result of the long press operation. In this case, when the display result is not a big hit, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90% of the maximum value), the meter value may not be increased even if the long press operation is performed. . It is desirable to provide a case where the meter value does not reach the maximum value even when the display result is a big hit. In this way, even when the meter value does not reach the maximum value, the possibility of a big hit remains, and it is possible to enhance interest. In addition, the meter display by the long press button effect may be utilized for a hit or not effect or a win / off button effect performed after the long press button effect. For example, it may be possible to execute a win-brick effect incorporating a meter display by a long-press button effect or a win-benefit button effect, or if the meter value is larger, a win-brick effect or tonality with a higher degree of expectation or rarity. The hour button effect may be performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to enhance the relevance between the effects, and to improve the effects of the effects.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to delete the displayed operation promotion image (step S8171). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended (step S8172). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the long press button effect valid flag (step S8173). The long press button effect image and the effective period end image are erased after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  Further, in step S8169, when the long press operation of the push button 120 is not detected, the effect control CPU 101 is the end timing of the long press button effect (that is, the detection valid period end timing of the long press button effect). Whether or not it is confirmed (step S8174). And if it is the completion | finish timing of long press button production, it will transfer to step S8171. Also, if it is not the end timing of the long press button effect, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image according to the remaining period of the detection effective period (step S8175). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8176.

  In step S8176, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step S8176), the CPU for effect control 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S803) Step S8177).

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined operation is performed until the end of the detection effective period, the processing in steps S8116, S8130, S8144, S8158, and S8172 is performed in the process of rendering design variation. Also, since the detection valid period end notification is performed, it is possible to easily recognize that the detection valid period has ended based on the operation.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 36 to 40, after the button effect image is displayed, the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are erased, and the effective period end image is displayed (for example, step S8114 to S8116), for example, the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image may be deleted, and the button effect image may be displayed after the effective period end image is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are deleted at the end timing of the detection effective period of the button effect, but the predetermined period of the end timing of the detection effect period of the button effect is Before the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image (or only one) may be configured to be erased. By configuring in this manner, the operation performed at the timing when the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image are deleted is not detected as the operation within the detection effective period, and the player may feel distrust Can be avoided.

  FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the big hit symbol has been displayed in a stopped state but fanfare production has not yet been executed, so the process of finalizing the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed The process moves to step S8305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S8301a), and if it is not set, the processing ends.

  If the confirmation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the confirmation command reception flag (step S8301b). Further, control is performed to display the stop symbol (off symbol, big hit symbol) of the rendering symbol that has been determined (step S8302).

  Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control shifts to step S8311. Do.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the big hit start designation commands has been received (step S8305). Note that whether or not any jackpot start designation command has been received, specifically, a flag (big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received, This determination can be made by checking whether a flag (small hit / suddenly sudden change big hit start specified command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / sudden sudden change big hit start specification command has been received is set. If one of the big hit start designation commands has been received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306). If the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designation command received flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S8307). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the rendering device (rendering display device 9 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and speakers 27 as a rendering component) is executed according to data 1 and movable member control data 1) (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  If it is determined that neither a big hit nor a small hit is made (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation specification command reception flag and the second symbol variation specification command reception flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the button effect upon acceptance or rejection. FIG. 42 (A1) to (E1) show a specific example in the case of executing a button effect at the time of acceptance or rejection by the first effect mode when the display result is a release.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (A1), on the display screen of the effect display device 9, when the toning effect (for example, an effect to fight against the enemy character) is started, the fluctuation display of the effect pattern in the reach state is in the lower left part. It is displayed reduced.

  Subsequently, when the detection effective period of the button effect (the first effect mode) at the time of yes or no is started, the first operation promotion image (middle) 201b (middle button image) is displayed as the operation promotion notification. Further, the remaining effective period image 203 indicating the remaining period of the detection effective period is displayed (FIG. 42 (B1)). Then, in the remaining effective period image 203, according to the elapsed period (that is, according to the remaining period of the detection effective period), the indication region (corresponding to a black area in the example of FIG. 42) indicating the remaining period Are updated so as to decrease the ratio of the data to (FIG. 42 (C1)).

  Here, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the first hit / not-turned button effect image 204a indicating the character of "losing ..." is displayed, and the final stop symbol ("6" which is a lost symbol) is displayed. A temporary stop is displayed. Further, at this time, the first operation prompting image (middle) 201b (middle button image) and the remaining effective period image 203 are erased, and the effective period ending image (proportion of occupied area in meter display area as notification of end of detection effective period) The remaining effective period image 203) where is 0 is displayed (FIG. 42 (D1)).

  Thereafter, the first on-off button effect image 204a and the effective period end image (the remaining effective period image 203 in which the ratio of the instruction area to the meter display area is 0) is erased, and the display screen center of the effect display device 9 is The dislocated symbol "767" is stopped and displayed (Fig. 42 (E1)).

  FIG. 42: (A2)-(E2) shows the specific example in the case of performing the button presentation at the time of the yes or no by the 3rd presentation mode, when a display result is a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (A2), on the display screen of the effect display device 9, when the toning effect (for example, an effect to fight against the enemy character) is started, the fluctuation display of the effect pattern in the reach state is in the lower left part. It is displayed reduced.

  Then, when the detection effective period of the button effect (third effect aspect) at the time of success or failure is started, as the operation promotion notification, the first operation promotion image (large) 201c (large button image) and the second operation promotion image (one strike) ) 202 b is displayed. Further, the remaining effective period image 203 indicating the remaining period of the detection effective period is displayed (FIG. 42 (B2)). Then, in the remaining effective period image 203, according to the elapsed period (that is, according to the remaining period of the detection effective period), the indication region (corresponding to a black area in the example of FIG. 42) indicating the remaining period Is updated so as to decrease the ratio of the data to (FIG. 42 (C2)).

  Here, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the second hit or not button effect image 204b indicating the character of “winning!” Is displayed, and the final stop symbol (“7” as the big hit symbol) is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. At this time, the first operation prompting image (large) 201c (large button image), the second operation prompting image (one blow) 202b and the remaining effective period image 203 are erased, and the effective period ending image is notified as the detection effective period end notification. (The remaining effective period image 203 in which the ratio of the indication area to the meter display area is 0) is displayed (FIG. 42 (D2)).

  Thereafter, the second success / failure button effect image 204b and the effective period end image (the remaining effective period image 203 in which the ratio of the instruction area to the meter display area is 0) is erased, and the display screen center of the effect display device 9 is The jackpot symbol "777" is stopped and displayed (Fig. 42 (E2)).

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory view showing a modified example of the detection effective period end notification. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 (A1) to (C1), when the detection effective period is started, operation promotion notification is performed in the effect display device 9 (for example, the first operation promotion image ( Middle) 201b is displayed), and the remaining detection effective period image 203 is displayed (Fig. 43 (A1)). Further, in the remaining effective period image 203, an instruction area (corresponding to a black area in the example of FIG. 43) indicating the remaining period corresponds to the meter display area according to the elapsed period (that is, according to the remaining period of the detection effective period). Is updated so as to decrease the ratio of the data to (FIG. 43 (B1)).

  Then, when the operation is detected, the effective period end image (the remaining effective period image 203 in which the ratio of the instruction area to the meter display area is 0) is displayed immediately (FIG. 43 (C1)).

  On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIGS. 43 (A2) to (D2), when the operation is detected, the effective period end image is not displayed immediately, and the ratio of the indication area to the meter display area is A rapidly decreasing remaining lifetime image 203 is displayed (FIG. 43 (C2)). After that, an effective period end image (a remaining effective period image 203 in which the ratio of the instruction area to the meter display area is 0) is displayed (FIG. 43 (D2)). It is possible to make the player easily recognize the change of the meter display area by performing the display for rapidly reducing the ratio of the instruction area. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the detection valid period ends by the operation, and can also recognize that the operation is completed (the pressing operation of the push button 120 is detected).

  The display in which the ratio of the instruction area to the meter display area rapidly decreases may be realized, for example, by reproducing a moving image prepared in advance. Also, the speed at which the ratio of the designated area is rapidly reduced is arbitrary. It is sufficient that the player can recognize that the speed is higher than the speed at which the indication area decreases when the operation is not detected.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the above embodiment, an effect of changing the mode of the push button 120 according to the degree of expectation may be executable. For example, the push button 120 is configured to incorporate a white LED, a red LED and a vibrator (oscillation motor) so that the color of the white LED and the red LED can be viewed by the player, and vibrates when the vibrator is operated. I assume. Hereinafter, the effect of changing the mode of the push button 120 is also referred to as operation portion effect. When performing the operation unit effect, a notification to urge the operation of the push button 120 is performed, and when the operation of the push button 120 is detected (or when the detection valid period elapses), the aspect of the push button 120 is changed to the normal state You may make it return.

  In addition, the operation part effect and each button effect may be combined and executed. Specifically, when the detection effective period of the button effect is started, the mode of the push button 120 is changed by the operation portion effect, and the operation promotion image is displayed on the effect display device 9 by the operation promotion notification. Then, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected, in the effect display device 9, the button effect image is displayed and the operation promoting image is erased, and the mode of the push button 120 is returned to the normal state.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the operation part effect. FIG. 44 (A) shows the case where the operation promotion notification is performed without performing the operation part effect, and FIG. 44 (B) shows the case where the operation promotion effect is performed while the operation unit effect is performed.

  When the operation promotion notification is performed without performing the operation unit effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the effect control CPU 101 performs an operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion as the operation promotion notification of the button effect Control is performed to display the image (small) 201 a) on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  On the other hand, when performing the operation section effect and performing the operation promotion notification, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the effect control CPU 101 operates the operation promotion image (for example, the first operation) as the operation promotion notification of the button effect. While performing control which displays a promotion image (small) 201a on the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9, control which changes the aspect of the push button 120 from a normal aspect is performed as operation part presentation.

  The normal mode of the push button 120 is a state in which no color is generated (the white LED and the red LED are off), and vibration by the vibrator is not performed. Therefore, when changing the mode of the push button 120 from the normal mode, the effect control CPU 101 performs control of two or more of color development by white LED, color development by red LED, or vibration by vibrator. .

  In the configuration capable of executing the operation part effect, for example, it is determined whether or not the operation part effect is to be performed in the effect symbol variation start process, and in the case of execution, the mode of operation promotion notification and the mode of the operation portion effect decide. The mode of the operation promotion notification and the mode of the operation section effect are determined, for example, using the operation section effect setting table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of the operation unit effect setting table. As shown in FIG. 45, in the operation section effect determination table, determination values corresponding to the combination of the mode of the operation promotion image displayed by the operation promotion notification and the mode of the push button 120 after change by the operation section effect It is set. In addition, the example which displays the 1st operation promotion image which imitated the external appearance of the push button 120 by different color / size as an operation promotion image is shown by FIG. Further, in FIG. 45, the number of determination values is described.

  For example, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the button effect in the effect symbol variation start process, the mode of the first operation promotion image and the mode of the push button 120 after the change are the values of random numbers for operation section effect determination It determines in the aspect corresponding to the judged value which corresponds with. In addition, CPU101 for production control uses the table shown to FIG. 45 (A), and when it is decided not to make the display result of a special symbol into a big hit symbol (it makes it a big hit symbol (big hit) If it is decided to use the table shown in FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 45, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the rate at which the mode of the push button 120 is determined to be “vibration” is larger than in the case of a falling. In addition, the number of determination values corresponding to “red” is more likely to be a big hit compared to the case where it is lost. That is, the changed aspect of the push button 120 suggests the possibility of becoming a big hit.

  Also, focusing on the aspect of the first operation promotion image, when it is a big hit, the percentage determined to be “red” is larger than in the case of a loss. The percentage determined to be "red / large" is larger in the case of a big hit than in the case of a big hit.

  In addition, when the aspect of the push button 120 is determined to be “red” (specifically, “red” or “red / vibration”), the aspect of the first operation promotion image is “white” (specifically, , "White / small" or "white / large"). That is, the effect control CPU 101 displays the first operation promotion image of the aspect common to the plurality of aspects of the push button 120. In addition, even when the aspect of the push button 120 is determined to be “white” (specifically, “white” or “white / vibration”), the aspect of the first operation promotion image is “ "White" (specifically, "white / small" or "white / large") may be determined.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45, the “common mode” is “white”, but may be “white / small” or “white / large”. That is, some aspects of the first operation promotion image are the same. However, the "common aspect" may be completely the same.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 101 collectively determines the aspect of the first operation promotion image and the aspect of the push button 120 after change, but may separately determine them. Good. In that case, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the aspect of the first operation promotion image by lottery using random numbers, for example, and determines the aspect of the push button 120 after change by lottery using other random numbers.

  In addition, when the button effect and the operation section effect are combined and executed, for example, when determining the effect mode of the button effect to be executed, the mode of the operation section effect is determined together with the mode of the operation promotion notification of the button effect. You may do it. Further, in this case, for example, when processing (step S8111 and the like) in which the operation promoting image is displayed is performed in the effect symbol variation processing, the mode of the push button 120 is changed from the normal mode by the operation section effect The control to change may be performed, and the control to change the mode of the push button 120 to the normal mode may be performed when the process (step S8115 or the like) in which the operation promotion image is erased is performed. In addition, when the button effect is performed, the operation unit effect may be always performed, or it may be determined whether or not the operation unit effect is to be performed, for example, by a lottery using a random number.

  As described above, when the operation section effect can be executed, the mode of the push button 120 is changed to any of a plurality of modes according to the expectation to the big hit gaming state, and according to the expectation to the big hit gaming state Since the first operation promotion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes, but the first operation promotion image in a mode common to a plurality of modes of the push button 120 is displayed, moreover, depending on the expectation to the big hit gaming state The display mode of the first operation promotion image is changed to any of a plurality of display modes, and the mode of the push button 120 is made any of a plurality of modes according to the degree of expectation to the big hit gaming state Is set to a mode common to a plurality of display modes of the first operation promotion image (for example, “white” shown in FIG. 45 (specifically, “white” or “white / vibration”). In the production It is possible to further improve the interest of that game.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 45, the effect is achieved by combining “red / small” or “red / large” (for the first operation prompting image) with “red” or “red / vibration” (for the push button 120). It will not be executed. If the mode of the first operation promotion image (in this case, red) and the mode of the push button 120 (in this case, red) are the same, the player may expect something, By preventing the operation promotion notification and the operation unit effect from being executed in the same manner, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the player expected something but no event according to the expectation occurs.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45, coloring and vibration are used as the type of the push button 120, but the rotation of the push button 120, the protrusion (bounce) of the push button 120, the temperature change of the push button 120, the push button 120. Or the like may be used. Moreover, although white and red were used as color development of the push button 120, those colors are an example.

  Also, the operation section effect can be executed at any timing during, for example, the variable display or the big hit game, and during the variable display, it is executed in a different mode according to the big hit or the degree of expectation to develop into super reach. During a big hit game, the game may be executed in a different manner according to the increase in the number of rounds and the degree of expectation to be shifted to an advantageous game state (time reduction state or probability change state) after the big hit game.

  In addition, the operation unit effect is not limited to one that changes the mode of the push button 120 from the normal mode when the operation promotion notification is performed (that is, before the operation of the push button 120 is detected). After the prompt notification, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the aspect of the push button 120 may be changed from the normal aspect. For example, in the case where the button effect and the operation unit effect are executed in combination, the button effect image is displayed when the operation of the push button 120 is detected after the operation promotion notification is performed, and the push button is displayed. The aspect of 120 may be changed from the usual aspect.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the detection means (in this example, the push button 120) capable of detecting the action of the player, and the promotion notification (in this example, for promoting the action of the player) And predetermined notification (in this example, based on the fact that the action of the player is detected by the detection means, and promotion notification means capable of executing the operation promotion notification for displaying the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image). , Effect presentation means capable of executing each button effect). Then, the promotion notification means at least the first promotion notification for promoting one operation (in this example, an operation of pressing the push button 120 once, an operation of continuously hitting, and an operation of long pressing). A first pattern for displaying an image (in this example, a first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120), and a second promotion image (in this example, a predetermined character) in addition to the first promotion image It is possible to execute by the second pattern which displays 2 operation promotion images) (see FIGS. 32 to 34). In addition, the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern the prompt notification has been executed (in this example, the first effect of the button effect at the time of consent display when the operation prompt notification is performed by the first pattern) The degree of expectation differs between the mode and the second effect mode and the third effect mode of the button effect at the time of acceptance or rejection in which the operation promotion notification is performed according to the second pattern (see FIG. 32C). Therefore, it is possible to show the expectation to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Specifically, even if the expectation is different depending on the aspect of the prompt notification means, the expectation may be difficult to understand. However, as in this embodiment, the number of images displayed by the prompt notification means If the degree of expectation is configured to be different due to the difference (the first pattern and the second pattern), the player can intuitively recognize the degree of expectation.

  In this embodiment, the operation of the player is detected by detecting whether the operation of the push button 120 is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the stick controller 122 may be detected. The player's action may be detected by means of In addition, depending on whether or not the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is operated a predetermined number of times, it is not limited to one that detects the player's operation, and for example, predetermined information (for example, using the push button 120 or the stick controller 122) The operation of the player may be detected based on whether or not an operation of inputting a specific command or the like has been performed. Also, in place of or in addition to the push button 120 and the stick controller 122, when the operation of the player is detected, a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor for inputting a detection signal is provided. The motion of the player may be detected. Further, in this case, the present invention is not limited to the mode of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 34. For example, an image imitating the appearance of the stick controller 122 and an image showing the characters “close” are displayed or a hand is held over a sensor The operation promotion notification may be performed by displaying an image imitating a state and an image showing a character of "Holding hand".

  In addition, that the prompt notification for prompting one operation can be executed by the first pattern and the second pattern is, for example, an operation prompt notification for prompting the user to press the push button 120 once. It is executable by one pattern and the second pattern, and an operation promotion notification for urging an operation (for example, one operation) to press the push button 120 once can be performed by the first pattern, and the push button It does not mean that the operation promotion notification for prompting an operation (for example, an operation different from one operation) to continuously hit 120 can be performed by the second pattern.

  Further, in this embodiment, the prompt notification by the second pattern has a higher degree of expectation than the prompt notification by the first pattern (in this example, the button prompt of the disapproval of the operation prompt notification by the second pattern is performed) In the second and third effect modes, the expectation is higher than in the first effect mode of the button effect at the time of acceptance or rejection in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern (see FIG. 32C). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to show the player an expectation level in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notification by the second pattern can be executed in any of a plurality of modes (in this example, in the second effect mode of the button effect at the time of passing or not, the first operation promotion image (large ) And the second operation promotion image (press) is displayed, and the operation promotion notification according to the second pattern is displayed, and in the third effect aspect of the button effect at the time of acceptance or rejection, the first operation promotion image (large) and the second operation promotion image ( An operation promotion notification is performed according to a second pattern to display one blow (see FIG. 32C). Therefore, the effects can be enhanced by various effects.

  Further, in this embodiment, the prompting means includes the first prompting image in a plurality of modes (in this example, the first operation prompting image (small), the first operation prompting image (middle), the first operation prompting image ( Large) and the like, and the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the first prompting image is displayed (in this example, the first operation prompting image (middle)). The first effect mode of the button effect at the time of success or failure when the operation promotion notification to be displayed is performed, and the second effect mode of the button effect of the success or failure when the operation promotion notification for displaying the first operation promotion image (large) is performed and the third The degree of expectation is different from the effect mode (see FIG. 32C). Therefore, various effects can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved by changing the degree of expectation shown for each effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notifying means displays the second promotion image in any of a plurality of modes (in this example, the second operation promotion image (press), the second operation promotion image (one blow, etc.)). It is possible, and the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the second promotion image is displayed (in this example, the operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image (press) is performed. The degree of expectation differs between the second effect mode of the button effect at the time of turning and the third effect mode of the button effect at the time of success or failure in which the operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image (one blow) is performed. )reference). Therefore, various effects can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved by changing the degree of expectation shown for each effect.

  In this embodiment, displaying the first promotion image in any of a plurality of modes is a first operation promotion image (small), a first operation promotion image (middle), a first operation promotion image (large). To display the second promotion image in any of a plurality of modes, the second operation promotion image (press), the second operation promotion image (one strike), and the second operation promotion. Although the example which displays an image (continuous hit) and a 2nd operation promotion image (long press) was demonstrated, the example of a several aspect is not restricted to this. For example, with regard to the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120, the color and the state (for example, the state in which the push button 120 pops out and the state in which it does not pop out) are different in addition to the size. It can be made into a different aspect. In addition to the characters, the second operation prompting image indicating a predetermined character can be made into a different aspect by changing the size and the color.

  For example, even if it is a 1st operation promotion image which imitated the appearance of push button 120 of the same size, when the process until it is displayed differs, it can be said that a 1st operation promotion image is displayed by a different mode. Specifically, when the small button image is displayed instantaneously, the small button image is divided when the density is gradually changed from a state where lightness and darkness can not be visually recognized to a state where the density gradually increases and it is easily visible. When a small button image is gradually combined and the whole is displayed, and when a predetermined sound is output with the display of the small button image, when a control is performed to turn on a predetermined light emitter with the display of the small button image Can be said that the small button image is displayed in a different manner. In other words, “displaying the first promotion image (the second promotion image) by any of a plurality of modes” is not limited to the one having a different mode depending on the difference in the finally displayed image, and the difference in the displayed process Is a concept that includes different aspects.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect at a plurality of timings (in this example, at the time of high-speed fluctuation of the effect pattern, reach establishment, success or failure, etc.) (see FIG. 31). ), The promotion notification means executes the promotion notification by either the first pattern or the second pattern at different rates according to the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed (in this example, the button effect is executed at high speed change) In the timing at which the operation is performed and the reach formation button effect is performed, the operation prompting notification is performed by the first pattern at a rate of 100%, and the display result is lost at the timing at which the button effect is performed In the case of, the operation promotion notification is executed by the first pattern (the second pattern at the rate of 30%) at the rate of 70%, and when the display result is the big hit (At a rate of 65% the second pattern) the first pattern in a proportion of 35% to perform operations promoting notification by reference. Figure 32). Therefore, it is possible to focus on the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed.

  In this embodiment, the operation promotion notification is executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at the timing when the hit or not button production is executed, but at the time of high speed fluctuation At the timing when the button effect or the button effect when the reach is established, the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern, and at the timing when the button effect is performed when the yes or no, the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern You may Also, for example, the operation promotion notification may be executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern even at the timing when the button effect at high speed fluctuation or the button effect at reach establishment is executed. In this case, for example, when the operation promotion notification is executed by the second pattern at the timing when the high speed variation button effect is executed, it is determined that at least the reach state will be reached, and the timing when the reach effect button effect is executed In the above, when the operation promotion notification is executed by the second pattern, it may be decided that at least the development of the super reach effect is established.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that promotion alerting | reporting may be performed by either a 1st pattern and a 2nd pattern by a different ratio according to the timing by which predetermined presentation is performed, it replaces with this In addition to or, for example, according to the game state (time decrease state and probability change state), according to the difference of production mode, to execute promotion information with the ratio which differs with either the 1st pattern and the 2nd pattern Also good

  Further, in this embodiment, the detection means includes operation means (in this example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122, etc.) operable by the player, and the effect execution means is predetermined according to the operation on the operation means. Effect (in this example, each button effect) can be executed, and an effective period notifying means (in this example, displaying an image of the remaining effective period informing the effective period in which the operation is effective) and the effective period have ended And an end notification means for indicating the end of the effective period (in this example, the effective period end image is displayed), and the end notification means is operated until the effective period ends. When the end notification is performed. Therefore, it can be made easy to recognize that the effective period has ended based on the operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, the detection means includes operation means (in this example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122, etc.) operable by the player, and the effect execution means is an operation effect using the operation means ( In this example, when the processing (step S8111 and the like) in which the operation promotion image is displayed in the process of executing the operation section effect (for example, in the process of effect pattern variation) is executed by the operation section effect The promotion notification means includes a control for changing the mode of the button 120 from the normal mode, and the promotion notification means is a promotion image (in this example, a predetermined color, a predetermined size) for prompting the operation when the operation effect is performed. 45 includes the display control means for displaying on the display means (in this example, the effect display device 9), the operation effect executing means performs the operation according to the degree of expectation The stage is changed to any of a plurality of modes (in this example, “white”, “red”, “white / vibration”, “red / vibration” shown in FIG. 45), and the display control means responds to the degree of expectation To display the promotion image in any of a plurality of modes (in this example, “white / small”, “red / small”, “white / large”, “red / large” shown in FIG. 45), and It is configured to have common image display control means for displaying the promotion image of the aspect common to a plurality of aspects (in this example, “white” (“white / small” and “white / large” shown in FIG. 45)) It may be By configuring as such, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the effect using the operation means.

  In this embodiment, the first promotion notification for promoting one operation (in this example, an operation of pressing the push button 120 once, an operation of continuously hitting, or an operation of long pressing) is the first promotion A first pattern for displaying an image (in this example, a first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120), and a second promotion image (in this example, a predetermined character) in addition to the first promotion image (2) It is possible to execute with the second pattern that displays the operation promotion image), but instead of or in addition to this, the operation promotion image is displayed on the effect display device 9 and light emitters such as predetermined LEDs and lamps The alert notification can be executed by a pattern of lighting or blinking the image, an operation prompting image displayed on the effect display device 9, and a pattern of outputting a predetermined sound or a combination of these. Good. Further, the degree of expectation may be different depending on which pattern the prompt notification is to be executed.

  The timing at which the predetermined effect (in the present example, each button effect) is executed based on the detection of the player's action by the detection means is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, but a pseudo-series It may be any timing, such as during production, pre-reading advance notice production, or during a big hit production. Also in this case, the promotion notification may be performed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at different rates according to the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed. For example, when a predetermined effect is performed during the pseudo-series effect, different ratios before and after the temporary stop of the effect pattern in the pseudo-series effect (or depending on how many times the pseudo series is performed) The prompt notification may be performed by either the first pattern or the second pattern.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the predetermined effect (in this example, each button effect) suggests that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display during the variable display, with a different degree of expectation However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be suggested that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display based on any one of the retention memories, as by so-called pre-reading notice, with different expectations. . For example, on the basis of the fact that an operation is detected during the detection effective period, it is suggested that a big hit will occur with different expectations by changing the hold display to any of a plurality of display modes. Good.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of each button production may be determined in production | presentation symbol fluctuation start processing, you may comprise so that those may be determined in processing during production design fluctuation. For example, in the effect symbol variation start process, whether or not each button effect is to be executed, the detection effective period in the case of execution is determined, and when the operation is detected during the detection effective period during the effect symbol processing. The aspect of the button effect image may be determined and displayed.

  The configuration shown in the above embodiment can be applied to a gaming system called a so-called portable interlocking system. In general, a gaming system called a mobile interlocking system is a gaming machine that outputs predetermined information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a predetermined benefit for the player based on predetermined information output by the gaming machine. And a privilege giving device for performing a process of giving.

  Specifically, in the gaming system as described above, the gaming machine plays predetermined conditions such as the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of so-called consecutive villas (the number of big hits in a definite change state ongoing), and the number of mission achievements. It accumulates as a history and displays a two-dimensional code etc. as predetermined information at the end of the game. In addition, the player captures a two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine using a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function, and transmits it to a Web server (a privilege giving device) on the Internet. Then, the Web server manages the game history of the player based on the received information, and performs a process of providing a predetermined benefit according to the game history. For example, the Web server transmits digital content such as image content and music content to the player's portable terminal as a predetermined benefit, or transmits a predetermined password to the player's portable terminal, and the player next time When playing a game, processing is performed to enable customization of the display screen of the gaming machine according to the preference of the player.

  When the configuration described in the above embodiment is applied to a gaming system as described above, for example, the fact that a button effect of the third effect mode is executed and a jackpot is executed is regarded as the establishment of a predetermined condition. The number of times may be managed by the Web server as a game history. Then, the digital content may be transmitted as a predetermined benefit or the display screen of the gaming machine may be customized according to the number of times the button effect at the time of success or failure of the third effect mode is executed and a big hit is made. .

  In the above embodiment, when the variation control is started to notify the microcomputer for effect control 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo sequence 1 Although one variation pattern command is transmitted, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the change time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, “the proportions are different” means not only those having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. A: B = 100%: 0% is a concept that includes different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the substrate on which the circuit for controlling the rendering device is mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 etc. and a circuit equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27 etc.) Two substrates with two effect control substrates may be provided.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 may use another board (for example, FIG. 4). (Sound / lamp board) having a function by the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 or the sound output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 or the like and a function by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35 The control command may be transmitted, and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a game machine, but according to the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of game machines are operated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. When the combination of stop symbols turns to a specific symbol combination when the symbol is turned and the symbol is stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, the predetermined number of medals are applied to the slot machine to be paid out to the player It is also possible. For example, when the configuration described in the above embodiment is applied to a slot machine, an operation prompting image is displayed at an arbitrary timing such as during rotation of a symbol, and a stop button (or an operation button provided separately from the stop button) ) By performing a predetermined effect based on the fact that the player has made a drop (such as a big bonus or a regular bonus) or a freeze effect, a result of an RT (replay time) lottery, an AT (assist time) lottery As a result, the result of ART (assist replay time) lottery may be indicated. Also in this case, the degree of expectation may be configured to be different depending on the number of operation promotion images to be displayed (for example, only the first operation promotion image, or the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image). Depending on the degree, the first operation prompting image and the second operation prompting image may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes.

  In the above embodiment, although the game machine uses game media as an example, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type game machine that seals game media such as, and gives a score when a prize giving condition is established.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is shown to be controlled to a definite change state after the big hit game based on the fact that there is a definite variation big hit or normal big hit as a big hit classification and a definite variation big hit as a big hit classification. Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a positive change state after the end.

  In the above embodiment, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” and deriving and displaying the display result is shown, but the variable display is such an aspect Not limited. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed to be variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to be a big hit, and determines when winning a variation pattern type (prefetch determination), and indicates the result of the winning determination (A symbol designation command and a variation category command) may be transmitted, and the preview control notice may be executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the command indicating the result of the winning determination. In addition, for example, it may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination) on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a command specifying only the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) or the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the occurrence of the start winning. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on the value of the random number designated by the command.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  In addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that plays a game by firing a gaming medium (e.g., gaming ball P) in a gaming area (e.g., gaming area 9010). , A pachinko game machine 901, etc.), a rail member (eg, a game board (eg, game board 902, board 90200, etc.)) attached to the game board so as to surround the game area and guiding game media (eg, , The inner rail 90501 / the first outer rail 90502 / the second outer rail 90503, etc., the collided body (for example, the elastic member 90600 etc.) with which the game medium collides, and the collided body attached to the gaming board A first holding body (for example, a rail decoration frame 90410 attached to the game board 902 with the elastic member 90600 attached) held at a predetermined position of the game board A second holding body for holding the first holding body attached to the game board (for example, a rail pressing piece 90174, a second outer rail 90503, a glass door frame 9050 of a panel pressing member 90162a for pressing the rail decoration frame 90410, etc. ), Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122, the infrared sensor, etc.), and an acceleration notification (for example, the first operation promotion image or the first (2) Promotion notification means capable of executing an operation promotion notification for displaying an operation promotion image (for example, a portion where the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8111, S8125, S8139, S8153, S8167) and the game by the detection means Based on the detection of the motion of the person, a predetermined effect (for example, each button effect Effect executing means (for example, a portion for executing the game control microcomputer 100 to execute steps S8114, S8128, S8142, S8156, S8170), and the promotion notifying means performs one operation (for example, pushing) A first promotion image (for example, a first operation promotion image imitating the external appearance of the push button 120) for prompting the user to press the button 120 once, press continuously, or press and hold one of the operations. And a second pattern for displaying a second prompting image different from the first prompting image (for example, a second operation prompting image showing a predetermined character) in addition to the first prompting image. (Refer to FIGS. 32 to 34), and which of the first pattern and the second pattern was used to execute the prompt notification Depending on the degree of expectation (for example, the first effect aspect of the button effect at the time of refusal operation when the operation prompting notification is performed by the first pattern, and the button effect of the operation prompting when the operation prompting notification is performed by the second pattern The second presentation mode and the third presentation mode have different degrees of expectation. FIG. 32 (c) is possible, and the rail member is a fixed part (for example, fixed part 90504T, 90504U, etc.) fixed to the game board and a part which is not fixed to the game board and is flexible. And a non-fixed portion (for example, non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C etc.) having elasticity, and the non-fixed portion has a contact portion (for example, protrusions 90507A to 90507F / standing wall portion 513 etc.) The gaming board side is provided with an abutted portion (for example, recessed portions 90207A to 90207F and the like) to which the abutting portion can abut, and the abutment is performed in a state where the rail member is attached to the gaming board A space is formed between the portion and the abutted portion (for example, when the protrusions 90507A to 90507F are inserted into the recesses 90207A to 90207F, the protrusions 90507A to 90507 are formed. A void S is formed around the 07 F. A void (a separation dimension L5) is formed between the upright wall portion 90513 and the third guiding member unit 90302. See FIGS. 59, 60, and 61). The gaming machine to be

  According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to show the expectation to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, when game media collide with the rail member, damage to the rail member can be suppressed by absorbing the impact by bending the non-fixed portion, and the contact portion contacts the abutted portion. Since the non-fixed portion is prevented from being largely displaced, the game medium can be stably guided. Furthermore, the stability of the first holding body is improved by holding the first holding body holding the collided body by the second holding body in a state where the first holding body is attached to the game board, and thus the positional deviation of the crashed body It can control that game nature is spoiled. In addition, even if the game machine sways when the player performs an action such as pressing the push button once or pressing the push button one time after the promotion notification is executed, the non-fixed portion of the rail member The impact can be absorbed by bending, so that damage to the rail member can be suppressed, and the non-fixed portion is prevented from being largely displaced by the abutment portion coming into contact with the abutted portion. Can be guided stably, so that it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a decrease in game play during a game.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that can be attached to the gaming board so as not to damage the rail member, firing a game medium (for example, the game ball P) to the game area (for example, the game area 9010) A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 901) for playing a game by being attached to the gaming board so as to surround the gaming board (eg, gaming board 902, board 9020) and the gaming area, A rail member (for example, inner rail 90501 / first outer rail 90502 / second outer rail 90503 etc.) to be guided, a collided body (for example, an elastic member 90600) with which a game medium collides, and the game board attached The first holding body (for example, the elastic member 90600 is attached to the game board 902 in a state where the object to be collided is held at a predetermined position on the game board) And a second holding body for holding the first holding body attached to the game board (for example, a rail pressing piece 90174 of a panel press fitting 90162a for pressing the rail decoration frame 90410, a second outer rail 90503, glass door frame 9050), and the rail member is a fixed part (for example, fixed part 90504T, 90504U) fixed to the game board,
It is a part which is not fixed to the game board, and is provided with a flexible non-fixed part (for example, non-fixed parts 90505A to 90505C), and the non-fixed part is a contact part (for example, projection 90507A) The game board side is provided with an abutted portion (for example, recessed portions 90207A to 90207F) to which the abutting portion can abut, and the rail member is provided on the game board In the attached state, an air gap is formed between the abutting portion and the abutted portion (for example, when the projections 90507A to 90507F are inserted into the recesses 90207A to 90207F, the projections 90507A An air gap S is formed around S.about.90507 F. An air gap (separation dimension L5) is formed between the upright wall portion 90513 and the third guiding member unit 90302. FIGS. See FIG. 61) the gaming machine and the like, characterized in that. Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, an example of a gaming machine corresponding to another embodiment will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 46 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main substrate. In the following, the front side of FIG. 46 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 901 from the front side It explains as a standard. Note that the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment is an opposing surface facing a player who plays a game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  FIG. 46 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. Pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "gaming machines") 901 are roughly classified into a gaming board 902 (also referred to as a "gauge board") having a gaming board surface 90200A on the front side, and a gaming board 902 supported and fixed And a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903. In the game board 902, a game area 9010 in a substantially circular shape in a front view surrounded by the guide rails 902b is formed. In the game area 9010, a game ball P as a game medium is fired from a ball striking device (not shown) and shot. In the gaming machine frame 903, a glass door frame 9050 having a glass window 9050a is provided so as to be rotatable around the left side, so that the gaming area 9010 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 9050, When the glass door frame 9050 is closed, the game area 9010 can be seen through the glass window 9050 a. In addition, the glass door frame 9050 is formed in a size that can cover the entire front surface of the gaming machine frame 903. A hitting operation handle 9051 is provided below the glass window 9050a. In the following description, the game ball P may be referred to as a "game ball".

  The game board 902 is formed of a translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc. in a substantially square shape in a front view, and an obstacle nail (not shown) or a guide rail on the game board surface 90200A which is the front. It mainly comprises a panel board 90200 provided with 902b and the like, and a spacer member 90250 integrally mounted on the back side of the panel board. In addition, although the game board 902 was comprised with the synthetic resin material which has translucency, it is not restricted to this, It is comprised in front view substantially square shape by non-translucent members, such as a plywood. May be

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 46, the lower right position of the game area 9010), a first special symbol display 904A and a second special symbol display 904B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B is a special symbol (a plurality of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each in a special drawing game as an example of a variable display game. “Also referred to as“ special drawing ”) is displayed variably (also referred to as“ variation display ”or“ variable display ”). In the following, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display 904A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display 904B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 9010 on the game board 902, an effect display device 905 is provided. The effect display device 905 is configured of, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display Device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, corresponding to the variation display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display 904A in the special figure game and the variation display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display 904B. For example, in the effect design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, effect designs that are plural types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of this effect pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 905, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 904A, or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, the variable display of a plurality of kinds of effect symbols which can be identified respectively is performed, and the finalized effect symbol (final stop symbol) to be the variable display result is derived and displayed.

  The effect display device 905 is disposed on the back side of the game board 902 and can be visually recognized through the opening 902 c formed in the game board 902. In the opening 902 c of the game board 902, a frame-shaped center decoration frame 9052 is provided.

  A first hold storage display area 905D and a second hold storage display area 905U are set at two places on the left and right of the lower part of the display area of the effect display device 905. In the first hold storage display area 905D and the second hold storage display area 905U, a hold storage display is performed to display the number of the hold storages for the variable display (the number of special view hold storages) corresponding to the special game.

  Here, the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B for suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special view game. It occurs based on the start-up winning by (entering). That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special drawing game and the variable display of the production symbol is satisfied, the variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. If the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, etc., the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is To be done.

  At the right side of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, there are a first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B to display the number of special drawing reservations in an identifiable manner. It is provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special map hold storage count in an identifiable manner, and the second reserve display 9025B displays the second special view reserve storage count in an identifiable manner.

  Under the effect display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A is provided, and under the right side of the effect display device 905, a normal variable winning ball device 906B is provided. The regular winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 906 B has a closed state in which the projecting position protrudes into the game area 9010 and a released state in which the retracted position retreats from the game area 9010 by the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric role shown in FIG. A normal motorized part having a movable plate changing is provided, and a second start winning opening is formed as a start area (second start area).

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls having passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first start port switch 9022A, and the first special view If the number of pending storages is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the first start condition is satisfied. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball having passed (entered) the second start winning opening is detected by the second start port switch 22B. The second start condition is satisfied when the number of to-be-registered special-character storages is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  As shown in FIG. 46, a special variable winning ball device 907 is provided on the right of the normal winning ball device 906A. The special variable winning prize ball device 907 forms a special winning prize port as a specific area which changes between the open state and the closed state by the special prize winning opening door which is driven to open and close by the solenoid 9082 shown in FIG. As described above, the special winning opening as a specific area is easy for the game ball to pass (enter) and an open state advantageous to the player, and the game ball can not pass (or enter) (or is difficult to pass) the player Change to a disadvantageous closing state.

  A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as winning balls based on the fact that the game ball having passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the special winning prize opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, the game ball can enter the special winning prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing the game ball to the big winning hole, which is difficult for the player. It is a disadvantageous second state.

  In the lower left and right sides of the effect display device 905, general winning openings 401A, 401B and 401C formed by the winning opening forming members are provided. The game ball having passed (entered) the general winning opening 401A, 401B, 401C is guided to a winning switch 9030 (see FIG. 47) provided on the back side of the game board 902 by a guiding passage not shown. It is detected that the gaming ball has passed (entered). Then, based on the passage (entry) of the gaming ball detected by the winning switch 9030, only a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls are paid out as the winning balls.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided on the right side of the second hold display 9025B. At the right side position of the normal symbol display 9020, a common view reserve display 9025C is provided. The general drawing retention indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general drawing retention memory number as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 9041.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area 9010, a gaming ball paid out as a winning ball and a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are supplied to a hitting ball launch device (not shown). An upper plate (ball hitting feed plate) (not shown) is provided which holds (reserves) possible. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a discharge port (not shown) for discharging extra balls and far balls overflowing from the upper plate to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 47, various types of pachinko gaming machines are transmitted between a main substrate 9011, an effect control substrate 9012, an audio control substrate 9013, an LED control substrate 9014, a main substrate 9011 and an effect control substrate 9012. Various substrates such as a relay substrate 9015 for relaying control signals, a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a emission control substrate, an interface substrate, and the like are disposed.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board consisting of a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 9011 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and the first special view or the second special view Of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020, and performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 It also has a function to control. Further, on the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111 and the like are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 47, from the gate switch 21 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the passing gate 9041, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 22B, the count switch 9023, and the winning switch 9030 on the main substrate 9011. Wiring for transmitting a detection signal of is connected. In addition, the display control of the first special symbol display 904A, the second special symbol display 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, the first hold indicator 9025A, the second hold indicator 9025B, the general drawing reserve indicator 9025C, etc. is performed. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for communication is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a change pattern designation command indicating a change pattern indicating a change mode of the change of the effect pattern, the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of the pseudo ream, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM 90101 (Read Only Memory 90101) storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control RAM 90102 (Random Access Memory 90102) for providing an area, CPU 90103 (Central Processing Unit 90103) for executing control operations by executing a program for game control, and updating of numerical data indicating random numbers independently of CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 to perform, and an I / O 90105 (Input / Output port 90105) are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and displays the effect Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electronic components for presentation such as the device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R and the LED 909 for presentation are mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 includes an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores effect control programs, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 90122 that provides a work area for effect control CPU 90120, and an effect display device A display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 905, a random number circuit 90124 that updates numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the effect control CPU 90120, and an I / O 90125 And is mounted.

  In the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of the effect display device 905, variable display of effect symbols is started in response to the start of the special drawing game.

 Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. On the main substrate 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. When the game control timer interrupt process is started in the game control main process, the switch process, the main side error process, the information output process, the game random number update process, the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process, and the command control process are executed. In addition, when the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 starts execution of the main processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process, the command analysis process, the effect control process process, and the effect random number update process are executed.

  Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described based on FIGS. FIG. 48 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. FIG. 49 is a front view showing a gaming machine frame to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 50 (A) is a perspective view showing the upper clamp, and FIG. 50 (B) is a perspective view showing the lower clamp.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the outer frame 9060 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by the upper plate 9061, the lower plate 9062, the left side plate 9063 and the right side plate 9064. The upper plate 9061 and the lower plate 9062 are formed of wood in a plate shape, and can be installed and fixed to a game island (not shown) installed in a game arcade or the like through nails or the like. The left side plate 9063 and the right side plate 9064 are formed in a plate shape by extrusion of an aluminum material.

  A curtain plate 90214 is provided in the lower part of the opening of the outer frame 9060, and the lower part of the opening is closed. At the upper left corner and lower left corner of the outer frame 9060, bearings rotatably supporting pivot shafts (not shown) provided in the upper left corner and lower left corner of the gaming machine frame 903 and pointing in the vertical direction A portion (not shown) is provided, and the gaming machine frame 903 is located between the closed position where the opening of the outer frame 9060 is closed and the opening position where the opening is opened. It is rotatably supported.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the gaming machine frame 903 is formed with an opening 90160 having a size into which a gaming component unit (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming board 902 can be inserted. In addition, locking recesses 90161a and 90161b are provided at the left upper and lower positions of the opening 90160, and panel retainers 90162a and 90162b are provided at the right upper and lower positions, and the left end of the game board 902 In the state of being inserted into the locking concave portions 90161a and 90161b, the right end portion is attached by being locked by the panel press fitting 90162a and 90162b.

  As shown in FIG. 50A, the presser fitting 90162a is centered on a base portion 90170 fixed to the gaming machine frame 903 and a pivot shaft 90171 provided on the right side with respect to the base portion 90170 facing vertically. As a pivoting portion 90172 rotatably provided, a locking portion 90173 slidably provided with respect to the rotating portion 90172, and a rail suspended downward from the turning shaft 90171 side of the rotating portion 90172 Mainly composed of a pressing piece 90174.

  The rotating portion 90172 is always urged toward the opening direction by a coil spring (not shown) annularly mounted on the rotating shaft 90171, and at the lower portion is a board presser that can press the front upper side right side of the game board 902 from the front side A piece 90172a extends in the left-right direction. Locking portion 90173 has a locking claw (not shown) that can be locked to a locked portion (not shown) formed on base portion 90170, and an operation piece 90173b for performing a locking release operation. And is always urged in the locking direction by a compression spring (not shown).

  In the lock release state shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 50 (A), the panel press fitting 90162a configured in this way is in the lock position against the urging force of the coil spring (not shown). By moving to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 50 (A), the locking claw (not shown) is locked in the locked portion (not shown). Further, in the locked state shown by the solid line in FIG. 50 (A), operating the operation piece 90173b against the biasing force of the compression spring (not shown) moves the locking portion 90173 toward the pivot shaft 90171 side. As shown in FIG. 50 (A), the locking to the locked portion (not shown) by the locking claw (not shown) is released, and the pivoting portion 90172 is released by the biasing force of the coil spring (not shown). Turn to

  As shown in FIG. 50 (B), the presser fitting 90162b has a base portion 90180 fixed to the gaming machine frame 903 and a pivot shaft 90181 provided on the right side with respect to the base portion 90180 facing in the vertical direction. And a locking portion 90183 provided so as to be slidable relative to the rotating portion 90182.

  The rotating portion 90182 is always urged toward the opening direction by a coil spring (not shown) annularly mounted on the rotating shaft 90181, and a lower portion holds the board presser that can press the front lower side right side of the game board 902 from the front side A piece 90182a extends in the left-right direction. The locking portion 90183 has a locking claw (not shown) capable of locking to a locked portion (not shown) formed on the base portion 90180, and an operation piece 90183b for performing a locking release operation. And is always urged in the locking direction by a compression spring (not shown).

  In the lock release state shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 50 (B), the panel press fitting 90162b configured in this way locks the pivoting portion 90182 against the biasing force of the coil spring (not shown). By moving to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 50 (B), the locking claw (not shown) is in a locked state where it is locked to the locked portion (not shown). Further, in the locked state shown by the solid line in FIG. 50 (B), operating the operation piece 90183b against the biasing force of the compression spring (not shown) to move the locking portion 90183 toward the pivot shaft 90181 side. As shown in FIG. 50 (B), the locking to the locked portion (not shown) by the locking claw (not shown) is released, and the pivoting portion 90182 is released by the biasing force of the coil spring (not shown). Turn to

  Here, a method of attaching the gaming board 902 to the gaming machine frame 903 will be described based on FIG. 49 and FIG. When the gaming board 902 is attached to the gaming machine frame 903, first, the pivoting parts 90172 and 90182 and the locking parts 90173 and 90183 of the upper and lower board pressing hardware 90162a and 90162b are moved to the open position. Next, with the back of the game board 902 directed to the opening 90160, the left side of the game board 902 is inserted into the locking recesses 90161a and 90161b from the front of the gaming machine frame 903 and the locking recesses 90161a and 90161b The right side of the game board 902 is pushed backward as the center. Then, the rear peripheral edge of the game board 902 abuts on the peripheral edge of the opening 90160 of the gaming machine frame 903 so that the gaming board 902 is positioned on the gaming machine frame 903 and the back of the gaming board 902 is the opening 90160 I come to the back side through.

  In addition, the left side of the game board 902 is inserted into the locking recesses 90161a and 90161b from the front of the gaming machine frame 903, and the right side of the game board 902 is pushed backward with the locking recesses 90161a and 90161b as the center. The game is performed by moving the rotating parts 90172 and 90182 and the locking parts 90173 and 90183 of the upper and lower board clamps 90162a and 90162b from the open position to the locking position in a state where the game board 902 is arranged at the opening 90160 in The right sides of the upper and lower sides of the front surface of the disk 902 are pressed from the front by the disk pressing pieces 90172 a and 182 a. Then, the locking claw (not shown) is locked to the locked portion (not shown), so that the gaming board 902 is for the gaming machine by the locking recessed portions 90161a, 90161b and the upper and lower pressers 90162a, 90162b. It is held in a state of being attached to the frame 903. In addition, the board pressing pieces 90172a and 90182a have flat surfaces extending along the upper and lower sides of the game board 902, and in order to press the front upper and lower sides of the game board 902 with the flat surfaces, the game board 902 Can be stably held in the gaming machine frame 903.

  Further, the rail pressing piece 90174 has a flat surface opposite to the front upper right portion of the rail decorative frame 90410 described later, and the rail upper surface of the rail decorative frame 90410 is pressed by the flat surface. The frame 90410 can be stably held (see FIGS. 49 and 51).

  Next, the game board 902 will be described based on FIG. 51 and FIG. FIG. 51 is a front view showing the game board. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the game board and the like.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the game board 902 mainly includes a board 90200 and a spacer member 90250 integrally mounted on the back side of the board 90200. The thickness of the board 90200 is about 10 mm, and the whole is formed to be transparent. Further, the board 90200 forms a game area 9010 on the front side thereof with a glass window 9050a disposed substantially in parallel with the board 90200.

  In this embodiment, the entire panel board 90200 is formed transparent, but a translucent member capable of seeing through a decorative body (not shown) or the like disposed on the back side of the panel board 90200 from the front side If it is formed, it may be translucent or may be colored. In addition, even if the whole is not translucent, a translucent part may be formed in at least a part of the game area 9010.

  The spacer member 90250 is formed of a non-light transmitting member in a substantially square frame shape in a front view, and has a mounting portion 90250A on which the rear peripheral edge of the panel plate 90200 is disposed. The front surface portion of the mounting portion 90250A A plurality of positioning bosses for determining the position of the face plate 90200 are provided in a protruding manner, and a plurality of mounting bosses having a screw hole into which a mounting screw is screwed are provided in a protruding manner. Since the plate thickness of the mounting portion 90250A in the spacer member 90250 is about 10 mm, the gaming board 902 having a plate thickness of about 20 mm is formed by the spacer member 90250 and the board plate 90200.

  The first hole 90201 to which the display frame of the effect display device 905 disposed on the back side faces the front side and the center decoration frame 9052 is attached to the board 90200, the special variable winning ball device 907, ordinary A second hole 90202 to which a variable winning ball device 906B and a first guiding member unit 90300 having a guiding passage are attached, a third hole 90203 to which a normal winning ball device 906A is attached, and a fourth hole forming an out port 9016 A portion 90204, a fifth hole 90205 to which the passage gate 9041 is attached, and sixth holes 90206A to 90206C to which the general winning hole formation member is attached are formed penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 52). .

  In addition, a second guiding member unit 90301 for guiding the game ball is attached to the right upper position of the first guiding member unit 90300 on the game board surface 90200A which is the front of the board 90200, and the left position of the general winning opening forming member The third induction member unit 90302 for guiding the gaming ball is attached to the player.

  Further, a guide rail 90500 provided around the game area 9010 is attached to the game board surface 90200A. The guide rail 90500 includes an outer rail forming an outer edge of the game area 9010 and an inner rail 90501 (rail member) attached to the inside of the outer rail. Specifically, the outer rail is a predetermined length downward from the first outer rail 90502 extending while curving from the lower left to the upper right of the game area 9010 and the right end of the first outer rail 90502 (the end opposite to the discharge opening) And a second outer rail 90503 extending a predetermined length toward the out port 9016 therefrom. The first outer rail 90502 is made of a band plate-like metal material, and is fitted to the arc-shaped inner side surface of the rail decoration frame 90410 disposed on the outer side of the first outer rail 90502 with respect to the game board surface 90200A. The rail decoration frame 90410 is attached by being fixed by a plurality of screws N1. In FIGS. 49 and 51, for convenience of explanation, the number of screws N1 is shown smaller than the actual number.

  The second outer rail 90503 is made of synthetic resin and is attached to the game board surface 90200A by a plurality of screws N2. Below the second outer rail 90503, the first special symbol display 904A, the second special symbol display 904B, the first hold indicator 9025A, the second hold indicator 9025B, the normal symbol indicator 9020, A diagram reserve display 9025C is provided. In addition, on the right side of the second outer rail 90503, a label attaching unit 90520 is formed to which a label (certificate stamp) (not shown) issued by a third party organization on which the date of manufacture and the like is written is attached. Since the gaming machine without the label attached can not be placed in the hall, the second outer rail 90503 having the label attaching portion 90520 is fixed so that it can not be easily removed from the board 90200.

  The inner rail 90501 is made of a synthetic resin material, and extends in a circular arc shape upward by a predetermined length while curving from the left end of the second outer rail 90503 to the right. The inner rail 90501 is provided with a locking claw 90501a that can be locked in a locking groove 90503a provided at the left end of the second outer rail 90503 (the left end of the lower part of the second outer rail 90503). The second outer rail 90503 is connected to the second outer rail 90503 by the engagement between the second outer rail 90503a and the second hook 90501a. That is, since the inner rail 90501 is unitized with the second outer rail 90503 fixed firmly to the board 90200, it can be stably attached to the board 90200. In addition, the inner rail 90501 is attached to the game board surface 90200A by a plurality of screws N3 at fixing portions 90504T and 90504U described later.

  Although the first outer rail 90502 (rail decoration frame 90410), the second outer rail 90503, and the inner rail 90501 are fixed to the panel plate 90200 by the screw N1, the screw N2 and the screw N3 have been described, the invention is limited thereto. Instead, they may be attached (fixed) to the board 90200 by welding or press fitting.

  A launch ball passage 90402 is formed between the inner rail 90501 and the first outer rail 90502, and the game ball P knocked in from the ball striking device is guided to the launch ball passage 90402 and flows into the game area 9010 . Specifically, the game ball P launched from the non-illustrated ball striking device provided at the lower right of the game board 902 moves along the first outer rail 90502 toward the shooting ball passage 90402 upwards to play the game area It is guided to the upper left of 9010. Then, when the player performs the first operation on the bat operating handle 9051, the gaming ball P entering the game area 9010 flows down the first path K1 on the left side of the center decoration frame 9052, and the player performs the bat operating handle 9051 When the second operation in which the firing intensity is stronger than one operation is performed, the gaming ball P entering the game area 9010 flows down the second path K2 on the right side of the center decoration frame 9052.

  A ball return prevention device 90700 is provided at the free end (upper end) of the inner rail 90501. This ball return prevention device 90700 has a plate-like opening / closing portion 90701 pivotally supported pivotably to the free end of the inner rail 90501, and the opening / closing portion 90701 blocks the launch ball passage 90402 by a weight portion not shown. It is urged to do. Further, when the open / close unit 90701 closes the launch ball passage 90402, the weight unit is locked to the inner rail 90501 so that it can not further rotate in the left direction (see FIG. 51). ). According to this, the game ball P knocked in from the ball hitting and launching apparatus bounces the opening and closing part 90701 against the bias by the weight part and flows into the game area 9010 and also shoots the ball from the game area 9010 The game ball P which is going to return to the inside of the passage 90402 is prevented from returning to the inside of the firing ball passage 90402 by the opening and closing part 90701.

  The rail decoration frame 90410 is a resin member formed in an arc shape extending from the lower left to the upper right of the game area 9010 through the upper left. The first outer rail 90502 is attached to the arc-shaped inner side surface of the rail decoration frame 90410. In addition, an elastic member 90600 formed of an elastic material such as rubber is attached as a collision target at a position where the tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 51) of the first outer rail 90502 is attached on the inner surface of the rail decoration frame 90410 The game ball, which has been fired from a ball hitting and launching apparatus (not shown) and moved along the inner side of the first outer rail 90502 with a force above a predetermined level, strikes the elastic member 90600 and damps the force while the center of the game area 9010 It bounces back to the club side.

  Next, the structure of the inner rail 90501 will be described based on FIG. 53 to FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view showing the structure of the inner rail, and (B) is a rear view of the same. FIG. 54 is a perspective view showing a part of the back side of the inner rail. 55A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. 53B, and FIG. 55B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. FIG. 56 is a front view showing the structure of a board. FIG. 57 (A) is an enlarged view of the surrounding portion A in FIG. 53 (B), and (B) is an enlarged view of the surrounding portion B in the same manner. 58A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 56, and FIG. 58B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. FIG. 59 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the inner rail is attached to the board. FIG. 60 is a schematic view showing (A) an aspect in which the gaming ball flows down the first path, (B) is an enlarged view of the main part of (A), and (C) is an EE sectional view of (A). is there. FIG. 61A is a schematic view showing a state in which a foul ball collides with the inner rail, and FIG. 61B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the inner rail 90501 is formed by filling a non-translucent synthetic resin or the like into a mold (so-called injection molding), and a flange provided along the game board surface 90200A. It has a portion 90512 and a standing wall portion 90513 erected from one side edge of the flange portion 90512. The inner rail 90501 may be made of metal such as an iron plate as long as it has flexibility.

  When the inner rail 90501 is attached to the game board surface 90200A, the standing wall portion 90513 is erected on the front side (player side) from the game board surface 90200A (see FIG. 58). The inner rail 90501 is made of resin and has an arc shape, so it can be bent and deformed. That is, the non-fixed portion 90505A has flexibility.

  As shown in FIG. 53, screw holes 90506T and 90506U for inserting the screw N3 are formed in the vicinity of both ends in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the inner rail 90501, and in the vicinity of the screw holes 90506T and 90506U, the game board surface It is fixing parts 90504T and 90504U fixed to 90200A. Further, portions of the inner rail 90501 other than the fixing portions 90504T and 90504U, that is, portions not fixed to the game board surface 90200A are non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C. Therefore, when the inner rail 90501 is attached to the game board surface 90200A, the non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C, in particular, the non-fixed portion 90505A between the fixed portions 90504T and 90504U are easily bent and deformed. That is, the non-fixed portion 90505A has flexibility.

  Specifically, since fixed portions 90504T and 90504U are formed in the vicinity of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the inner rail 90501, both ends in the longitudinal direction of the inner rail 90501 are orthogonal to the rising direction (front and rear direction) of the standing wall portion 90513 The thickness in the (left and right direction) is thick, and the rigidity is high. In other words, the thickness of the non-fixed portion 90505A (first portion) corresponding to the middle portion of the inner rail 90501 is thinner than the thickness of the other portion (second portion), and the standing wall portion 90513 in the inner rail 90501 It is easy to bend and deform in the direction orthogonal to the rising direction of the On the other hand, the thickness of non-fixed portions 90505B and 90505C and fixed portions 90504T and 90504U (second portion) in inner rail 90501 is formed thicker than the thickness of non-fixed portion 90505A, compared to non-fixed portion 90505A. It is hard to bend and deform. Although the thickness of the non-fixed portions 90505B and 90505C is less likely to be bent and deformed as compared to the non-fixed portion 90505A, it can be slightly bent and deformed with a smaller width than the non-fixed portion 90505A.

  Further, the fixed portion 90504U, and a part of the non-fixed portion 90505A near the fixed portion 90504U and the non-fixed portion 90505B (second portion) have a rib shape in which a portion is cut away, for example, a game ball When P collides, the rib can be deformed to absorb the impact, and the weight of the inner rail 90501 can be reduced.

  Further, on the inner rail 90501, a plurality of projections 90507A to 90507F (contact parts) having a cross shape in cross section are provided at predetermined intervals on the back surface 90508 side (game board surface 90200A side) of the flange portion 90512 (six in this example) ) Is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, FIG. 55 (B), FIG. 57 (A), and FIG. 58 (B), the protrusions 90507A to 90507F are steps recessed toward the front side relative to the back surface 90508 of the inner rail 90501. It is provided so that it may project from the part to the back side. That is, a groove 90509 recessed on the front side relative to the back surface 90508 of the inner rail 90501 is formed around the protrusions 90507A to 90507F.

  The projections 90507A to 90507F are inserted into recesses 90207A to 90207F (contacted portions) described later provided on the game board surface 90200A, and the projections 90507A to 90507F are inserted into the recesses 90207A to 90207F. As a result, the inner rail 90501 is positioned on the game board surface 90200A (see FIG. 53). That is, the protrusions 90507A to 90507F and the recesses 90207A to 90207F are portions for positioning when the inner rail 90501 is attached to the board 90200. Further, as described later, the protrusions 90507A to 90507F are smaller than the recesses 90207A to 90207F, and the protrusions 90507A to 90507F are movable in the recesses 90207A to 90207F.

  Further, a plurality of (in this embodiment, 24) convex portions 90510 are provided at predetermined positions on the back surface 90508 of the inner rail 90501 so as to project from the back surface 90508 to the back surface side. The protruding length of these convex portions 90510 from the game board surface 90200A is about 0.1 mm to 2 mm.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 57B, a plurality of small holes 90511 are formed between adjacent convex portions 90510 at positions where the convex portions 90510 are disposed close to each other on the back surface 90508 of the inner rail 90501. There is. As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58B, in the state where the inner rail 90501 is attached to the board 90200, the convex portion 90510 abuts on the game board surface 90200A, and the back 90508 of the inner rail 90501 is the game board surface. It is separated from 90200A. The convex portion 90510 is illustrated to be thicker than the actual thickness for the convenience of description.

  In addition, as an example of injection molding, it advances and retreats from the outer surface side of one mold piece to the inner surface side through a plurality of half mold pieces and a plurality of through holes formed in predetermined places of the one mold piece. The resin is filled between half mold pieces using a possible eject pin, and after the resin is cured, the other mold piece is removed while holding the resin in one mold piece, and then the eject pin There is a method of extruding the resin and removing it from one of the mold pieces. When this method is used, when resin is filled between halves of the mold, the portion that has entered the gap formed between the through hole and the eject pin or the portion formed by the burr is the inner rail Project from the back of the This projecting portion may be used as a projection.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 59, recessed portions 90207A to 90207F are formed at positions corresponding to the protrusions 90507A to 90507F on the left side of the board 90200, and the fixing portions 90504T and 90504U of the inner rail 90501 When fixed to 90200A, the projections 90507A to 90507F are inserted into the recessed portions 90207A to 90207F. When the protrusions 90507A to 90507F are inserted into the recesses 90207A to 90207F, the protrusions 90507A to 90507F are movable in the recesses 90207A to 90207F.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59, the diameter L1 of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F is about 4.6 mm (L1 = 4.6 mm). On the other hand, concave portions 90207A, 90207B into which the protrusions 90507A, 90507B on the upper side (near the fixing portion 90504T) of the inner rail 90501 are inserted and projections 90507F in the lower side of the inner rail 90501 (near the fixing portion 90504U) are inserted The diameter L2 of the concave portion 90207F is about 5.3 mm (L2 = 5.3 mm). Furthermore, the diameter L3 of the concave portions 90207C to 90207E into which the protrusions 90507C to 90507E provided in the middle portion (non-fixed portion 90505A) of the inner rail 90501 are inserted is about 5.7 mm (L3 = 5.7 mm ). That is, when the protrusions 90507A to 90507F are inserted into the recesses 90207A to 90207F, the air gap S is formed between the side peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F and the inner peripheral surfaces of the recesses 90207A to 90207F. The projections 90507A to 90507F are movable in the recesses 90207A to 90207F, and the projections 90507A to 90507F abut on the inner circumferential surfaces of the recesses 90207A to 90207F to restrict movement.

  Further, since the protrusions 90507A, 90507B, and 90507F are provided in the vicinity of the fixing portions 90504T and 90504U, the amount of movement at the time of bending deformation of the inner rail 90501 is smaller than those of the protrusions 90507C to 90507E. Therefore, the diameter L2 of the concave portions 90207A, 90207B, and 90207F is smaller than the diameter L3 of the concave portions 90207C to 90207E into which the protrusions 90507C to 90507E are inserted (L2 <L3).

  When the inner rail 90501 is attached to the board 90200, the protrusions 90507A, 90507B, and 90507F are disposed substantially at the centers of the recessed portions 90207A, 90207B, and 90207F. That is, the air gap S is formed around the protrusions 90507A, 90507B, and 90507F, and the protrusions 90507A, 90507B, and 90507F are not in contact with any of the inner peripheral surfaces of the recesses 90207A, 90207B, and 90207F. Further, the protrusions 90507C to 90507E are arranged to be located on the right side of the recess 90207C to 90207E, and a relatively large air gap S is formed on the left side of the recess 90207C to 90207E (FIG. 58 (A) and FIG. B) see). This is because the frequency of collision from the first path K1 side is higher than that of the game ball P colliding with the inner rail 90501 from the launching ball passage 90401 side, as described later, to the left of the projections 90507C to 90507E. This is to secure the amount of movement preferentially.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 60C and 61B, the protrusions 90507C and 507D are in contact with the inner peripheral surface on the right side of the recessed portions 90207C and 90207D. That is, part of the side peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 90507C, 90507D abut the inner peripheral surfaces on the right side of the recessed portions 90207C, 90207D, and the air gap S is formed in other parts. Further, the protrusion 90507E disposed near the third guiding member unit 90302 described above is separated from the inner peripheral surface on the right side of the recess 90207E by a separation dimension L4. That is, the air gap S is provided around the protrusion 90507E and is not in contact with anywhere on the inner peripheral surface of the recess 90207E, but is larger on the left side than the protrusion 90507E. Further, the third guiding member unit 90302 and the inner rail 90501 are separated by a separation dimension L5 shorter than the separation dimension L4 (L4> L5). This is to ensure, with respect to the vicinity of the protrusion 90507E, the amount of movement of the protrusion 90507E to the right when the far ball P1 described later collides with the inner rail 90501 from the launch ball passage 90401 side. . In FIG. 60 (C) and FIG. 61 (B), the separation dimension L4 and the separation dimension L5 are illustrated larger than the actual size for convenience of explanation.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, the game balls P flowing down the first path K1 may collide with the inner rail 90501. In addition, since the game ball P launched from the hit ball launcher basically flows along the first outer rail 90502 into the game area 9010, the game ball P is more likely to collide with the inner rail 90501 from the launch ball passage 90401 side. The frequency of collisions from one route K1 side is high. Here, only an example in which the game ball P collides in the vicinity of the protrusion 90507C in the inner rail 90501 will be described, and the game ball P collides in other locations (near the protrusions 90507A, 90507B, 90507D to 90507F) The description of the aspect is omitted.

  As described above, the protrusions 90507C to 90507E are disposed on the right side of the concave portions 90207C to 90207E, and the relatively large air gap S is formed on the left side of the concave portions 90207C to 90207E, so the game areas 9010 flow downward. When the game ball P collides with the inner rail 90501, the inner rail 90501 is pushed from the first path K1 side to the launch ball passage 90401 side (right to left), and the non-fixed portion 90505A is bent and deformed. As shown in FIG. 60 (B), since the protrusion 90507C is inserted close to the inner peripheral surface on the right side of the recess 90207C, the protrusion 90507C is directed toward the inner peripheral surface on the left side of the recess 90207C with a gap S While moving to the left side, the projection 90507C abuts on the inner peripheral surface on the left side of the recess 90207C, whereby movement to the left is restricted.

  As described above, since the projection 90507C is movable due to the space S with the recess 90207C, the non-fixed portion 90505A may be bent when the gaming ball P collides with the inner rail 90501 from the first path K1. As the impact can be absorbed, damage to the inner rail 90501 can be suppressed, and even if the protrusion 90507C moves, contact with the recess 90207C prevents the non-fixed portion 90505A from being largely displaced. The game ball P can be stably guided.

  In addition, since the projection 90507C is inserted into the recess 90207C, the movement range of the projection 90507C falls within the recess 90207C. Therefore, the large displacement of the non-fixed portion 90505A is reliably prevented.

  Although only the example in which the gaming ball P which flows down the first path K1 collides with the protrusion 90507C in the inner rail 90501 has been described here, the protrusion 90507A ~ any position of the inner rail 90501 90507F is moved, and the same effect as that of the projection 90507C can be obtained.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), when the player's ball hitting operation handle is weak, the game ball P may not flow back into the shooting area 9010, but may flow backward in the shooting ball passage 90401 ( So-called, far ball P1). In addition, when the foul ball P1 is generated, the next game ball P2 may be fired before the foul ball P1 returns to the ball striking device. In this case, the gaming ball is fired with the backward ball P1. P2 collides, and the fowl ball P1 (or the launched gaming ball P) collides with the inner rail 90501. As a result, the inner rail 90501 is pushed from the launch ball passage 90401 side toward the first path K1 side (left to right). In addition, since the far ball P1 often collides with the game ball P2 in the vicinity of the protrusion 90507E in the inner rail 90501 according to the firing timing of the ball hitting and launching apparatus, here, the far ball in the vicinity of the protrusion 90507E in the inner rail 90501 An aspect in which the ball P1 collides will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 (C) and 58 (B), the protrusion 90507E disposed near the third guiding member unit 90302 (first structure) has a distance L4 from the inner peripheral surface on the right side of the recess 90207E. Since the separation is performed, the protrusion 90507E moves to the right. Further, since the separation width between the third induction member unit 90302 and the inner rail 90501 is a separation dimension L5 shorter than the separation dimension L4, the protrusion 90507E is in contact with the inner peripheral surface on the right side of the recess 90207E. The raised wall portion 90513 (abutment portion) of the inner rail 90501 abuts on the outer surface of the third guiding member unit 90302. In other words, the standing wall portion 90513 abuts on the third guiding member unit 90302 when the far ball P1 collides with the non-fixed portion 90505A. Thereby, a large positional deviation of the non-fixed portion 90505A is prevented.

  As described above, when the non-fixed portion 90505A is bent and deformed toward the first path K1, a structure in which the standing wall portion 90513 of the non-fixed portion 90505A having higher strength than the protrusion 90507E is attached to the game board surface 90200A. Since it abuts on the third induction member unit 90302, bending deformation of the non-fixed portion 90505A can be stably regulated. Further, when the non-fixed portion 90505A is not bent and deformed toward the first path K1, the standing wall portion 90513 does not abut on the third guiding member unit 90302, so that deterioration due to wear can be suppressed. In addition, when the game ball P flowing down the periphery of the third guiding member unit 90302 collides, the standing wall portion 90513, which is temporarily curved toward the firing ball passage 90401 and then restored by elastic deformation, is largely curved toward the gaming area 9010. Is prevented.

  In addition, since the third induction member unit 90302 and the inner rail 90501 are separated, for example, even if the inner rail 90501 is not removed from the board 90200 in the case of deterioration due to aging or model change to a new game board The third guiding member unit 90302 can be easily replaced / changed.

  Further, as described above, since the protrusions 90507A and 90507B are disposed approximately at the centers of the recesses 90207A and 90207B, when the ball F1 collides with the upper portion of the inner rail 90501 (near the protrusions 90507A and 90507B) The non-fixed portion 90505B can be bent and deformed toward the first path K1.

  In this embodiment, since the far ball P1 often collides with the gaming ball P2 in the vicinity of the projection 90507E in the inner rail 90501, the far ball P1 is in the vicinity of the projection 90507E in the inner rail 90501. In the illustrated example, the protrusions 90507C and 90507D may be disposed apart from the inner peripheral surface on the right side of the recesses 90207C and 90207D.

  Further, as described above, since the board 90200 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc., dust is easily generated due to friction or the like due to its characteristics. There is. As shown in FIG. 54, when the inner rail 90501 is attached to the board 90200, the convex part 90510 abuts on the game board 90200A, and the back 90508 of the inner rail 90501 is separated from the game board 90200A. .

  As described above, when the inner rail 90501 is attached to the board 90200, the gaming board 90200A and the back surface 90508 of the inner rail 90501 do not abut on each other, and only the convex portion 90510 is partially on the gaming board 90200A. Since the contact between the game board 90200A and the inner rail 90501 makes it possible to minimize the dust generated from the board 90200, it is possible to suppress the surface of the game board 90200A from being contaminated by the dust.

  In addition, part of dust generated by the contact between the convex portion 90510 and the game board surface 90200A enters the small hole 90511 disposed in the vicinity of the convex portion 90510, so that it is difficult to scatter around. Further, part of the dust generated by the contact between the protrusions 90507A to 90507F and the recesses 90207A to 90207F enters the grooves 90509 provided around the protrusions 90507A to 90507F, so that it is difficult to scatter around the protrusions 90507A to 90507F. Therefore, maintenance work of the game board 902 is easy. Further, as described above, since the inner rail 90501 does not have translucency, dust adhering to the back surface 90508 of the flange portion 90512 and dust entering the small holes 90511 and the groove portion 90509 are transmitted through the inner rail 90501. The appearance is improved because it is not exposed from the front side. The inner rail 90501 may be made of, for example, a semi-translucent resin, a colored resin, or the like, as long as the dust does not easily stand out from the front side. In addition, non-translucent resin may be coated on the surface of the translucent member.

  Although this embodiment exemplifies a form in which the contact surface (tip end surface) of the convex portion 90510 with the game board surface 90200A is flat, the present invention is not limited to this, and the contact surface of the convex portion May be provided such that part of the dust generated by the contact between the convex part and the game board surface 90200A may enter into the concave part, and in this way scattering of the dust can be further suppressed .

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is a pachinko gaming machine 901 that plays a game by firing the gaming ball P in the gaming area 9010, and so as to surround the board 90200 and the gaming area 9010. The inner rail 90501 is attached to the board 90200 and guides the game balls P. The inner rail 90501 is a fixed part 90504 T, 90504 U fixed to the board 90200 and a portion not fixed to the board 90200 The non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C have protrusions 90507A to 90507F, and the protrusions 90507A to 90507F are in contact with the plate 90200. Possible recesses 90207A to 90207F, and the inner rail 90 In the state attached to 90200, the gap S is formed between the side end face and the recess inner peripheral surface of the 90207A~90207F projections 90507A～90507F.

  By doing this, when the game ball P collides with the inner rail 90501, the protrusions 90507A to 90507F can move in the recesses 90207A to 90207F, and the non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C bend to absorb the impact. Thus, damage to the inner rail 90501 can be suppressed, and the side surfaces of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F abut the inner peripheral surfaces of the recessed portions 90207A to 90207F, whereby the inner rail 90501 is fixed only by the fixing portions 90504T and 90504U. Since the non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C are prevented from being largely displaced as compared with the above, the gaming ball P can be stably guided.

  Further, the inner rail 90501 is a rail member that forms the game area 9010 on the right side and the launch ball passage 90401 on the left side, that is, the first outer rail 90502 and the second outer rail that the game ball P contacts from only one side. Unlike 90503, since it is a rail member which game ball P contacts easily from both sides and is damaged, it absorbs the shock by bending non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C as described above. Damage can be suppressed more suitably.

  Even when the synthetic resin material of the inner rail 90501 is deteriorated due to heat or the like and the root vicinity of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F is deformed, the side end surfaces of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F and the inner peripheral surfaces of the recesses 90207A to 90207F By forming the air gap S between them, no load is applied to the protrusions 90507A to 90507F, and breakage of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F can be prevented.

  Further, since the projections 90507A to 90507F are disposed inside the board 90200 by the recesses 90207A to 90207F, the abutted portions for locking the projections 90507A to 90507F are outside the board 90200 (game board 90200A Top) does not need to be specially formed. That is, the abutted portion does not affect the flow of the game ball P. Furthermore, dust generated by sliding contact between the side end surfaces of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F and the inner peripheral surfaces of the recesses 90207A to 90207F can be prevented from being exposed as much as possible to the game board surface 90200A.

  Further, in this embodiment, the concave portions 90207C to 90207E into which the projections 90507C to 90507E provided on the non-fixed portion 90505A most susceptible to bending deformation in the inner rail 90501 are inserted are provided in the vicinity of the fixed portions 90504T and 90504U. The projections 90507A, 90507B, 90507E are formed larger in diameter than the recesses 90207A, 90207B, 90207E to be inserted, and the projections 90507A, 90507B, 90507E are arranged on the right side of the recesses 90207A, 90207B, 90207E. Thus, the amount of movement of the non-fixed portion 90505A to the launch ball passage 90401 can be made large. Thus, breakage of the inner rail 90501 can be reliably suppressed.

  Further, when the inner rail 90501 is attached to the board 90200, the air gap S is formed between the side end surfaces of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F and the inner peripheral surfaces of the recesses 90207A to 90207F, so the recesses 90207A to 90207F are formed. It is easy to insert the projections 90507A to 90507F.

  In addition, since the projections 90507A to 90507F are inserted into the recesses 90207A to 90207F, the non-fixed portions 90505A become large when the side end surfaces of the projections 90507A to 90507F abut on the inner peripheral surfaces of the recesses 90207A to 90207F. Misalignment is prevented. That is, since the protrusions 90507A to 90507F are inserted into the recesses 90207A to 90207F, the movement range of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F is contained in the recesses 90207A to 90207F, and the non-fixed portion 90505A is largely displaced. It is prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, the standing wall portion 90513 of the inner rail 90501 whose strength is higher than that of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F can abut on the third guiding member unit 90302, and therefore, the structure is provided in the game area 9010 The bending deformation of the non-fixed portion 90505A can be stably regulated using the third guiding member unit 90302.

  In this embodiment, the projection 90507E is provided in the vicinity of the third guiding member unit 90302. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Since the bending deformation of the fixing portion 90505A can be restricted, the protrusion may not be provided in the vicinity of the third guiding member unit 90302. According to this, since the protrusions can be reduced or eliminated, the structure of the inner rail 90501 can be extremely simplified.

  Further, in this embodiment, a gap (a separation dimension L5) is formed between the standing wall portion 90513 and the third guiding member unit 90302, and the standing wall portion 90513 is formed by collision of the far ball P1 with the non-fixed portion 90505A. Since the standing wall portion 90513 does not always abut on the third guiding member unit 90302 in order to abut on the third guiding member unit 90302, deterioration due to wear can be suppressed.

  Further, the third guiding member unit 90302 can be easily replaced since it can be removed from the board 90200 without removing the inner rail 90501.

  Further, since the inner rail 90501 has at least the non-fixed portion 90505A, the non-fixed portions 90505B and 90505C, and the fixed portions 90504T and 90504U having higher strength than the non-fixed portion 90505A, the fixed portions 90504T and 90504U and the non-fixed portions 90505A The strength according to 90505C can be given. Therefore, the non-fixed portion 90505A can be made more flexible than the non-fixed portions 90505B and 90505C closer to the fixed portions 90504T and 90504U to improve impact resistance.

  Further, since grooves 90509 are respectively formed around the protrusions 90507A to 90507F in the inner rail 90501, powder or particles generated by contact between the side end surfaces of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F and the inner peripheral surfaces of the recesses 90207A to 90207F. Debris and the like enter into the groove 90509, which makes it difficult to scatter around.

  Next, the structure around the elastic member 90600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 62 is a perspective view showing the structure of the right side of the rail decoration frame. FIG. 63: (A) is a rear view of the right side part of a rail decoration frame, (B) is GG sectional drawing of (A), (C) is HH sectional drawing of (A). FIG. 64A is a six-face view showing the structure of the elastic member, and FIG. 64B is an I-I cross-sectional view of FIG. FIG. 65A is a perspective view showing the configuration of the right end portion of the first outer rail, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view showing another configuration of the right end portion of the first outer rail. FIG. 66 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (A), and (B) is a plan sectional view of the pachinko gaming machine shown in (A).

  The rail decoration frame 90410 is formed with a holding portion for holding the elastic member 90600. The holding portion is a plate-like first holding portion 90421 having an inner surface formed with a protruding portion 90422 (see FIG. 63B) to be press-fit into a through hole 90602 bored in an elastic member 90600, and an elastic member 90600. And at least a second holding portion 90423 facing a back surface 90604 which is a surface opposite to the surface 90601 on which the game balls collide.

  The first holding portion 90421 supports the elastic member 90600 by pressing the projecting portion 90422 of the first holding portion 90421 into the through hole 90602 of the elastic member 90600, and even when the game ball collides with the elastic member 90600. The position of the elastic member 90600 is kept from shifting. Further, since the elastic member 90600 can be removed by pulling out from the protruding portion 90422 of the first holding portion 90421, the maintenance property is improved.

  The protruding portion 90422 of the first holding portion 90421 has a step portion 90424 formed between the root portion and the end portion in the protruding direction, and engages with the step portion 90603 formed in the through hole 90602 of the elastic member 90600 By doing this, it is possible to prevent the position of the elastic member 90600 from shifting even if the game ball collides.

  Further, in the projecting portion 90422, the diameter of the base portion is larger than the diameter of the tip end portion with the step portion 90424 as a boundary. Therefore, the durability of the projecting portion 90422 can be enhanced to make the projecting portion 90422 more durable, and breakage of the projecting portion 90422 can be prevented.

  Further, the first holding portion 90421 has a plate-like portion 90425 having a protruding portion 90422 formed on the inner side surface (rear surface), and the outer side surface (front surface) of the plate-like portion 90425 corresponds to the protruding portion 90422 A recess 90426 recessed from the portion toward the inside of the projecting portion 90422 is formed. The durability of the protrusion 90422 can be improved by forming the recess 90426 and punching the inside of the protrusion 90422. In addition, by attaching a seal member to the front surface of the first holding portion 90421, the front opening of the concave portion 90426 formed on the front surface of the first holding portion 90421 is closed.

  The second holding portion 90423 has an engaged portion 90427 engaged with a step portion 90605 provided on the back surface 90604 of the elastic member 90600. Therefore, even if an impact is given to the elastic member 90600 due to a game ball collision or the like, the position of the elastic member 90600 may be shifted, or the protrusion 90422 in which the elastic member 90600 is press-fit into the through hole 90602 It can prevent rotating.

  Further, in a state where the elastic member 90600 is attached to the holding portion (the first holding portion 90421 and the second holding portion 90423) and the rail decorative frame 90410 having the holding portion is attached to the game board 902, FIG. A gap 9026 is formed between the elastic member 90600 and the game board 902, as shown in FIG. By having the gap 9026, the impact of the game ball colliding with the elastic member 90600 is prevented from being transmitted to the game board 902.

  Elastic member 90600 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape as shown in FIG. 64, and distance L1 between the center of the cylindrical shape which is the shape of through hole 90602 and collision surface 90601 is the shape of through hole 90602 It is longer than the distance L2 between the center of the cylindrical shape and the back surface 90604. Thus, the impact of the game ball colliding with the surface 90601 to be collided can be sufficiently absorbed by the elastic body of the elastic member 90600 within the range of the distance L1.

  Further, in a state where the elastic member 90600 is held by the holding portions (the first holding portion 90421 and the second holding portion 90423), at least the collision surface 90601 protrudes from the end of the first holding portion 90421 (FIG. 51). reference). For this reason, when the game ball fired from the hitting and launching apparatus (not shown) flies along the first outer rail 90502 with a predetermined momentum or more, it always collides with the surface 90601 to be collided of the elastic member 90600. Since the first holding portion 90421 does not collide, damage to the first holding portion 90421 can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63A, the collision surface 90601 is the first outer rail 90502 when the collision surface 90601 is held by the holding portion (the first holding portion 90421 and the second holding portion 90423). To the central part side of the game area 9010 with respect to the normal line T1 perpendicular to the tangent at the predetermined point, and to the side of the game board 90200A with respect to the perpendicular T2 perpendicular to the game board 90200A It is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined by a predetermined angle θ2 toward the end.

  Therefore, when the game ball P moving along the first outer rail 90502 collides with the colliding surface 90601 held by the holding portion (the first holding portion 90421 and the second holding portion 90423), the game ball P is It bounces back to the game board surface 90200A side in the direction away from the first outer rail 90502. Therefore, it is possible to guide to the passing gate 9041 and the general winning opening 90401C provided at a position apart from the first outer rail 90502 in the game area 9010 which spreads under the elastic member 90600, and the rebounding game ball P is the first It is possible to avoid colliding with the following gaming ball P moving along the outer rail 90502 to affect the flow of the following ball. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball P which has bounced from colliding with the glass window 9050a and damaging the glass window 9050a.

  As described above, the elastic member 90600 has the rebound angle and the speed of the game ball P according to the inclination and the repulsive force of the collision surface 90601 in the state of being held by the holding portion (the first holding portion 90421 and the second holding portion 90423). Therefore, it is a member that affects the flow-down path of the rebounded gaming ball P if the tilt may change in the held state.

  Further, the opening peripheral edge of the through hole 90602 in the elastic member 90600 is chamfered. As a result, the direction (front and back) of the elastic member 90600 is not mistaken, and the protrusion 90422 of the first holding portion 90421 of the rail decorative frame 90410 can be easily inserted into the through hole 90602.

  In elastic member 90600, as described above, distance L1 between the cylindrical center which is the shape of through hole 90602 and collision surface 90601 is the cylindrical center which is the shape of through hole 90602 and the back surface 90604. It is longer than the distance L2. For this reason, the direction when attaching the elastic member 90600 to the rail decoration frame 90410 is not mistaken.

  Further, in the elastic member 90600, the through hole 90602 is formed as a hole penetrating through one of six substantially rectangular parallelepiped faces and one face opposed thereto, and the through hole 90602 is formed in the through hole 90602. The end of the protrusion 90422 of the first holding portion 90421 to be inserted reaches at least the middle point of the through hole 90602 or the far side of this. Thereby, the absorbability of the impact when the game ball collides can be enhanced. In addition, the hole drilled in the elastic member 90600 is not limited to the through hole, and may be a hole which is not penetrated.

  At the right end of the first outer rail 90502, as shown in FIG. 65, a ground 90711 for escaping the generated static electricity is formed. Further, in the vicinity of the ground 90711 in the first outer rail 90502, a curved portion 90712 which is curved toward the outside of the arc-shaped first outer rail 90502 is formed. By having the curved portion 90712, the work of fitting the ground 90711 of the first outer rail 90502 to the back surface side of the rail decorative frame 90410 becomes easy. For example, the lower left portion of the first outer rail 90502 is fitted to the lower left portion of the rail decoration frame 90410, the first outer rail 90502 is placed along the inner side surface of the rail decoration frame 90410, and the earth 90711 is made of the rail decoration frame 90410. When fitting on the back side in the upper right, the curved portion 90712 can be bent or the like to fit in a predetermined position on the back side of the upper right portion of the rail decorative frame 90410 while finely adjusting the direction of the ground 90711 (See FIG. 63 (A)).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63C, the first outer rail 90502 and the elastic member 90600 are arranged with a predetermined gap therebetween in the state of being attached to the rail decoration frame 90410. Therefore, for example, the vibration generated by the movement of the game ball P along the first outer rail 90502 is not transmitted to the elastic member 90600 and does not affect the rebound angle or speed of the game ball P, etc. . In addition, it is avoided that the vibration generated by the collision of the game ball P with the elastic member 90600 is transmitted to the first outer rail 90502 to affect the flow-down path of the game ball P moving along the first outer rail 90502 Ru.

  Further, the elastic member 90600 is provided in a state of being in proximity to a position near the curved portion 90712 formed at the end of the first outer rail 90502 in a state of being attached to the rail decoration frame 90410. That is, as shown in FIG. 63A, the first outer rail 90502 is disposed along the elastic member 90600, but part of the first outer rail 90502 is separated from the elastic member 90600 due to the provision of the curved portion 90712. The elastic member 90600 can be held in such a way that the surface on the first outer rail 90502 side of the elastic member 90600 can be covered from the first outer rail 90502 side by a part of the second holding portion 90423. Support.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the state where the ground 90711 is attached to the back side of the first outer rail 90502, a part of the ground 90711 is on the front side through the hole 90507 formed in the first outer rail 90502. The projecting portion is adapted to contact a grounding member (not shown) provided on the back surface of the glass door frame 9050 when the glass door frame 9050 is closed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 65B, in the curved portion 90712 of the first outer rail 90502, a slit 90713 can be formed in a curved direction. By forming the slits 90713, when the ground 90711 is fitted on the back side of the upper right portion of the rail decoration frame 90410, it becomes easy to finely adjust the direction of the ground 90711.

  In the portion where the right side end of the rail decoration frame 90410 and the upper end of the second outer rail 90503 are joined, the right side end of the rail decoration frame 90410 is viewed from the front side as shown in FIG. An engaging portion 530, which is provided to project from the front side to the rear side at the upper end portion of the second outer rail 90503, is fitted to the engaged portion 90420 which is recessed toward the side. . As a result, the rail decoration frame 90410 is pressed from the front to the rear by the second outer rail 90503, so the stability of the rail decoration frame 90410 is improved.

  In the gaming board 902 configured in this way, the elastic members 90600 against which the game balls collide are held by the holding portions (the first holding portion 90421 and the second holding portion 90423) of the rail decoration frame 90410. Then, the rail decoration frame 90410 is screwed and fixed to the board 90200 using the plurality of screws N1, whereby the elastic member 90600 is disposed at a predetermined position on the board 90200. That is, the elastic member 90600 is provided at a predetermined position of the board 90200 via the rail decoration frame 90410.

  Then, the second outer rail 90503 is attached to the board 90200 by the plurality of screws N2 after the second outer rail 90503 is attached to the board 90200 by the plurality of screws N2, so that the engaging portion 530 of the second outer rail 90503 is the rail decoration frame 90410 The rail decoration frame 90410 is held by the surface plate 90200 by engaging with the engaged portion 90420 of the second embodiment and pressing the lower right end of the rail decoration frame 90410 from the front side by the second outer rail 90503.

  Furthermore, the game board 902 on which the rail decoration frame 90410, the second outer rail 90503, and the inner rail 90501 are attached to the board 90200 is assembled to the gaming machine frame 903 and the upper right end of the rail decoration frame 90410 is the presser bracket 90162a. The rail decorative frame 90410 is held by the board 90200 by being pressed from the front side by the rail pressing piece 90174 of

  In this manner, by attaching the rail decorative frame 90410 holding the elastic member 90600 to the board 90200, the elastic member 90600 is held at a predetermined position in the game area 9010, and the game board 902 is assembled to the game machine frame 903. The rail decorative frame 90410 is held by the rail decorative frame 90410 because the stability of the rail decorative frame 90410 is improved by pressing a plurality of locations of the rail decorative frame 90410 from the front side by the second outer rail 90503 and the rail pressing piece 90174. Positional displacement of the elastic member 90600 from the holding position is suppressed.

  The positional deviation means the positional deviation of the elastic member 90600 from the holding position to the front side, that is, the positional deviation of the board 90200 in the direction away from the gaming board 90200A, or the direction in which it rotates around the projecting portion 90422. Positional displacement, positional displacement in a direction along the game board surface 90200A, and the like are also included.

  Further, the second outer rail 90503 and the rail pressing piece 90174 of the panel pressing member 90162a function as a second holding body for holding the rail decorative frame 90410 on the panel plate 90200 in a state where the glass door frame 9050 is opened. Although not shown in particular, the glass window 9050a of the glass door frame 9050 approaches or abuts on the front surface of the first holding portion 90421 of the rail decoration frame 90410 when in the closed position, and thus the second holding when in the closed position. It functions as a body but does not function as a second holder when in the open position.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, as shown in FIG. 51, a passing gate 9041, a general winning opening 90401C, and a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are provided in the second path K2 on the right side of the center decoration frame 9052 in the gaming area 9010. When the game ball collided with the elastic member 90600 held by the first holding portion 90421 of the rail decoration frame 90410 moves down the second path K2 while changing the track due to the collision, it passes through the passing gate 9041 or There is a case that it enters to the prize winning opening 90401C. As described above, when the game ball passes the passing gate 9041, the variable display of the normal symbol is started, and the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the open state and the second starting winning hole, the second special symbol The variable display of may be started and controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, if the gaming ball wins the general winning opening 90401C, a predetermined number of winning balls can be obtained.

  That is, there is a possibility that the gaming ball having collided with the elastic member 90600 flows down the second path K2, and an advantageous value (for example, a big hit gaming state or a winning ball) may be provided to the player. Here, the path along which the gaming ball flows down the second path K2 may change depending on the amount and angle of bounce when it collides with the elastic member 90600. Therefore, the elastic member 90600 is replaced by an incorrect elastic member formed so that the game ball bounces in a direction advantageous to the player, or the direction of the elastic member 90600 is illegally changed, etc. If the etc. is changed, the number of gaming balls passing through the passing gate 9041 or entering the general winning opening 90401C may increase, which may increase the possibility of giving an advantageous value to the player. .

  Therefore, the plurality of portions of the rail decoration frame 90410 which is the first holding member holding the elastic member 90600 are screwed and fixed with the screws N1 so that the plurality of screws N1 can be removed to remove the elastic member 90600 from the panel plate 90200. You will need to remove it. Further, by providing the rail pressing piece 90174 of the panel press fitting 90162a, which is the second holding member for holding the rail decoration frame 90410, and the engaging portion 530 of the second outer rail 90503, the rail decoration frame 90410 can be In order to remove it, it is necessary to release the locked state by the panel press fitting 90162a or to remove the second outer rail 90503 from the panel plate 90200. Therefore, making the removal of the rail decoration frame 90410 difficult in this way and making replacement of the elastic member 90600 difficult makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts on the elastic member 90600.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is viewed from the front, the left end LT of the first outer rail 90502 is the inner side surface of the open glass door frame 9050. It is located on the left side of the virtual extended surface GT that includes it. Thereby, in a state where the game board 902 is assembled to the gaming machine frame 903, when trying to remove the rail decoration frame 90410 to which the first outer rail 90502 is attached, the glass door frame 9050 is largely opened. Also, if the first outer rail 90502 is to be removed to the front even if it is largely opened, the left portion of the first outer rail may abut against the glass door frame 9050, Removal of the rail decoration frame 90410 becomes difficult. Thereby, replacement of the elastic member 90600 can be made difficult, so that tampering with the elastic member 90600 can be suppressed more suitably.

  Furthermore, although the rail decorative frame 90410 is screwed to and fixed to the game board 902 using a plurality of screws N1, screw holes through which the screw N1 is inserted are drilled at a plurality of locations across the entire rail decorative frame 90410 ing. For example, as shown in FIG. 66, the rail decoration frame 90410 is positioned from the lower left side to the upper left side and further to the upper right side of the game area 9010, but these lower left side, upper left side and upper right side Screw holes are also formed on the upper side and the left side of the area 9010, and screwed and fixed to the game board 902 using a plurality of screws N1. Therefore, in the case of removing the rail decoration frame 90410 and replacing the elastic member 90600 to change the rebound amount and angle of the game ball, it takes time and effort to remove all the plurality of screws N1. Since the intention to do is diminished, the occurrence of the fraud can be suppressed.

  Among such pachinko gaming machines 901, there is a pachinko game machine including a collision target made of a rubber material or the like with which a game medium launched in the game area collides. Such a colliding body absorbs the impact and rebounds when the game medium collides.

  In this type of gaming machine, for example, a holding body for holding the collided object in a displaceable state, and by attaching the holding body to the game board with a screw, the collided body is held at a predetermined position on the gaming board Etc. However, in such a gaming machine, by attaching the holder to the game board with a screw, an impact of the game medium colliding with the collided object is transmitted to the holder and the holder is used as a game board. Misalignment of the holder due to loosening of the screw attached to the case causes instability of the bounce angle etc. of the game medium colliding with the collided body, which may affect the game characteristics such as the winning rate of the game medium. There was a problem of being there.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, an elastic member 90600, which is a colliding object with which a game medium collides, and a game board can be used to suppress loss of gaming properties due to positional displacement of the colliding object. A rail decorative frame 90410 which is a rail decorative frame 90410 which is attached to the 902 and holds the elastic member 90600 at a predetermined position of the game board 902 and a second holding body which holds the rail decorative frame 90410 attached to the game board 902 A rail pressing piece 90174 of a panel pressing member 90162a, a second outer rail 90503, a screw N1, and a glass door frame 9050 are provided. In this way, the stability of the rail decorative frame 90410 is improved by holding the elastic frame 90410 holding the elastic member 90600 by the second holding members in a state where the rail decorative frame 90410 is attached to the game board. It is possible to prevent the gameplay from being impaired due to the positional displacement of the elastic member 90600.

  In addition, the rail decoration frame 90410 does not release the holding state by the respective second holding members, for example, does not open the glass door frame 9050 and remove the panel press fitting 90162a, the second outer rail 90503, and the screw N1. As long as the game board 902 can not be removed. By doing this, it is possible to suppress that the rail decoration frame 90410 is easily removed from the game board 902.

  Further, the rail decorative frame 90410 has a plate-like portion 90425 and a projecting portion 90422 of the first holding portion 90421 of the rail decorative frame 90410 which is a restricting portion for restricting the positional deviation from the holding position of the elastic member 90600. By doing so, the elastic member 90600 can be prevented from being misaligned with respect to the rail decoration frame 90410 and the game property can be prevented from being impaired, and the elastic member 90600 is difficult to remove. Can reduce the act of

  Further, the restricting portion is an abutting surface on which the elastic member 90600 abuts in a state where the elastic member 90600 is held, and the first holding portion 90421 of the rail decorative frame 90410 is a plurality of abutting surfaces having different directions. An inner side surface (rear surface) of the plate-like portion 90425 and a surface of the second holding portion 90423 abutting on the elastic member 90600 are formed. By doing so, the colliding body can be pressed by a plurality of contact surfaces having different orientations, so positional deviation of the colliding body can be suitably suppressed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 63A, when the game ball P moving along the first outer rail 90502 collides with the collision surface 90601, the game ball P moves slightly away from the first outer rail 90502. When the game ball P collides with the collision surface 90601, the position at which the collision ball collides with the collision surface 90601 is different, and the elastic member 90600 pivots around the projecting portion 90422 due to such a displacement of the collision position. The resulting positional deviation is prevented.

  Further, the rail decoration frame 90410 has a projecting portion 90422 of the first holding portion 90421 of the rail decoration frame 90410 which is a holding pin inserted into the through hole 90602 which is an insertion hole formed in the elastic member 90600 In the portion 90422, the outer diameter of the base portion in the projecting direction which is the base side is larger than the outer diameter of the tip portion which is the tip portion side. By doing this, the durability of the holding pin against the impact generated on the elastic member 90600 can be enhanced.

  Further, the rail decoration frame 90410 has a projecting portion 90422 of the first holding portion 90421 of the rail decoration frame 90410 which is a holding pin inserted into the through hole 90602 which is an insertion hole formed in the elastic member 90600 The hollow portion 90426 is formed in the inside of the portion 90422. By doing this, the strength of the protruding portion 90422 is increased, so that the durability is improved.

  Further, the elastic member 90600 is held by the rail decoration frame 90410 so that at least a collision surface 90601 which is a collision portion where the game ball collides is positioned outside the rail decoration frame 90410. By doing this, it is possible to suppress that the game ball collides with the rail decoration frame 90410 and the rail decoration frame 90410 is broken.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the game ball collides with the inner rail 90501, the non-fixed portion is flexed to absorb the impact, thereby suppressing the breakage of the inner rail 90501 and the contact portion being hit Since the non-fixed portion is prevented from being largely displaced by coming into contact with the contact portion, it is possible to stably guide the gaming ball. In addition, the rail decorative frame 90410 holding the elastic member 90600 which is the collision object is held by the rail pressing piece 90174, the second outer rail 90503, the glass door frame 9050, etc. in a state of being attached to the game board 902, Since the stability of the rail decoration frame 90410 is improved, it is possible to prevent the gameplay from being impaired due to the positional deviation of the elastic member 90600.

  As described above, the rail members such as the inner rail 90501, the first outer rail 90502, and the second outer rail 90503 which form the game area 9010 and the elastic member 90600 against which the game balls guided by the rail member collide Since it is hard to shift against the position, it is possible to stably guide the gaming ball.

  As described above, one example of the other embodiment has been described with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. .

  For example, in the embodiment described above, the inner rail 90501 is illustrated as the rail member, and the non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C of the inner rail 90501 have the projections 90507A to 90507F formed as the contact portions. The present invention is not limited to this, and the non-fixed portions of the first outer rail 90502 and the second outer rail 90503 may be provided with contact portions.

  Further, as described above, the first outer rail 90502 is also provided with the non-fixed portion so that bending deformation is possible, and a protrusion as the contact portion is formed on the non-fixed portion as shown in FIG. The first outer rail 90502 and the elastic member 90600 are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined gap as shown in FIG. Since the vibration is not transmitted to the elastic member 90600, it does not affect the bounce angle, speed, etc. of the game ball P in the elastic member 90600. Also, since the end of the first outer rail 90502 is attached to the game board surface 90200A by fixing the rail decoration frame 90410 with a plurality of screws N1, the first outer rail 90502 can be bent and deformed. Even if there is, it is prevented from coming off the game board surface 90200A.

  In the embodiment, the non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C and the projections 90507A to 90507F are integrally formed by injection molding. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505A The 90505C and the projections 90507A to 90507F may be separately provided separately.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the protrusions 90507C to 90507E are illustrated as being disposed close to the right side of the recesses 90207C to 90207E, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the protrusions 90507C to 90507E You may arrange | position in the center of recessed part 90207C-90207E. That is, the positions and the like of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F with respect to the recesses 90207A to 90207F may be freely set in accordance with the direction in which the game balls collide, the strength, and the like. The size (diameter) of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F, the position with respect to the inner rail 90501, or the size of the gap formed between the side end surface of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F and the inner peripheral surface of the recesses 90207A to 90207F, etc. You may set it freely.

  In the embodiment described above, the hollow space S is formed between the side end surfaces of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F and the inner peripheral surface of the concave portions 90207A to 90207F. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to reducing the load applied to the protrusions 90507A to 90507F, the dust due to the sliding contact between the side end surfaces of the protrusions 90507A to 90507F and the inner peripheral surfaces of the recesses 90207A to 90207F may be reduced.

  In the embodiment described above, although the projections 90507A to 90507F are formed on the non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C of the inner rail 90501 and the recesses 90207A to 90207F are formed on the board 90200, the invention is limited thereto. Instead, the non-fixed portions 90505A to 90505C may be provided with recesses and the plate 90200 may be provided with protrusions. The recess may be a slit with a bottom, a through hole, or the like.

  Further, in the embodiment, the projections 90507A to 90507F have a substantially cruciform shape in plan view in order to give strength, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a shape or the like.

  In the embodiment described above, the projections 90507A to 90507F are the contact portions, and the recesses 90207A to 90207F are the abutted portions, and the upright wall portion 90513 of the inner rail 90501 is the contact portion, and the third guiding member unit Although the form which makes 90302 a to-be-contacted part was illustrated, it is not limited to this, What is necessary is just to provide the form of only any one. In addition, although the third guiding member unit 90302 is illustrated as a structure, the structure may be a nail provided in the vicinity of the inner rail 90501 or a member constituting a general winning opening.

  In the embodiment, the inner rail 90501, which is a rail member, is locked by locking the locking groove 90503a of the second outer rail 90503 having the label attaching portion 90520 from the front side of the locking claw 90501a of the inner rail 90501. Although the second outer rail 90503 can be removed from the board 90200 without removing the second outer rail 90503, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, engagement of the second outer rail 90503 having the label attaching portion 90520 By locking the locking claws 90501a of the inner rail 90501 from the front side of the locking groove 90503a, the second outer rail 90503 can not be removed from the panel plate 90200 unless the inner rail 90501 which is a rail member is removed. May be That is, the first structure such as the third guiding member unit 90302 can be easily removed and replaced from the surface plate 90200 without removing the inner rail 90501, while being a target of fraud. The second outer rail 90503 having a label attaching portion 90520 to which a label is attached, such as a second structure which is difficult to remove, is illegal by making it difficult to remove it from the board 90200 using a rail member. It can suppress that it is replaced | exchanged for the 2nd outer rail with which the label was stuck.

  In the embodiment described above, the embodiment in which the board 90200 is formed of a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc. is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this. May be formed of wood such as veneer. Even when the board is made of veneer, the convex portion 90510 abuts on the game board surface, so that the generation of wood chips and the like from the board due to the friction between the game board and the inner rail 90501 can be suppressed.

  In the embodiment, the fixed portions 90504T and 90504U are provided in the vicinity of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the inner rail 90501, the non-fixed portion 90505A is provided between the fixed portions 90504T and 90504U, and the non-fixed portion 90504T is not provided outside the fixed portions 90504T and 90504U. Although illustrated about the form provided with fixing | fixed part 90505 B and 90505 C, it is not limited to this, Sites other than a fixing | fixed part become a non-fixed | fixed part, And the flexibility of a non-fixed | fixed part As long as it is high, the location and number of fixed parts and non-fixed parts may be set freely. The fixing portion may also have flexibility.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the standing wall portion 90513 of the inner rail 90501 has been exemplified as the contact portion in contact with the structure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other portions in the inner rail such as a flange portion may be used.

  In the embodiment described above, the elastic member 90600 made of a rubber material is applied as an example of the collided body. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the collided body is limited to an elastic body. For example, it may be made of a synthetic resin material.

  In the embodiment described above, the rail support frame 90410 is applied as the first holding body for holding the elastic member 90600 at the predetermined position on the game board 902, but the present invention is not limited to this. Other rail members such as the outer rail 90503 and the inner rail 90501 may be used. Further, not only the rail member but also a member provided only for holding the elastic member 90600 may be used. Furthermore, the center decoration frame 9052, the 1st guidance member unit 90300, the 2nd guidance member unit 90301, the 3rd guidance member unit 90302, etc. should just be a member which a game ball can collide frequently. In the case of using the center decoration frame 9052, for example, it is conceivable that the elastic member 90600 is provided at the upper left portion (so-called bump position) so that the game balls entering the game area 9010 can collide.

  In the embodiment described above, the second holding body for holding the rail decorative frame 90410 attached to the game board 902 is exemplified by the board holding member 90162a and the second outer rail 90503. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Other rail members may be applied, for example, game ball guiding members such as the center decoration frame 9052, the first guiding member unit 90300, the second guiding member unit 90301, and the third guiding member unit 90302. Etc. may be applied.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the panel holding member 90162a as the second holding body for holding the rail decorative frame 90410 attached to the game board 902 and the second outer rail 90503 have the rail decorative frame 90410 from the front to the game board surface 90200A side. Although the member is held to be pushed to the side, it is not limited to this, and may be a member to hold a plurality of places on the side surface of the rail decorative frame 90410 from the side.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the panel holding member 90162a as the second holding body for holding the rail decorative frame 90410 attached to the game board 902 and the second outer rail 90503 are members that are held in contact with the rail decorative frame 90410 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a member which is disposed in the vicinity of the rail decoration frame 90410 so as to prevent positional deviation of a predetermined degree or more.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the screw N1 for attaching the rail decoration frame 90410 to the game board 902 exemplifies a form which can be removed without releasing the holding state by the panel press fitting 90162a and the second outer rail 90503 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be provided so that it can not be removed unless the holding state by the panel press fitting 90162a and the second outer rail 90503 is released.

  In the embodiment described above, the rail decorative frame 90410 can not be removed from the game board 902 unless the holding state by the panel retainer 90162a and the second outer rail 90503 is released. However, the present invention is limited thereto. Alternatively, the rail decorative frame 90410 may be removed from the game board 902 by removing only the screw N1 without releasing the holding state by the panel press fitting 90162a and the second outer rail 90503.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the plurality of screws N1 for screwing and fixing the rail decorative frame 90410 to the board 90200 are of the same type, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, a plus screw and a minus screw may be used in combination. As a result, a plurality of tools are required to remove the plurality of screws N1 and it takes time and effort, so it is possible to suppress a cheating attempt to replace the elastic member 90600.

  In the embodiment, the rail decorative frame 90410 and the center decorative frame 9052 are formed by different members, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in the first modification of FIG. It may be integrally molded as the frame 90800. That is, the center decoration frame 9052 and the rail decoration frame 90410 may be connected to each other through the plate-like side surface portion 90811 provided along the game board 902 in the passage 90810 in which the game balls move. By providing the decorative frame 90800 having such a shape, it is possible to enlarge the part and prevent the position of the elastic member 90600 from shifting, and at the decorative frame 90800, a portion 90410 'corresponding to the rail decorative frame 90410 and the center decorative frame The shape of the passage 90810 through which the game ball passes can be stabilized between the portion 9052 'corresponding to 9052, and the positional relationship between the portion 90410' corresponding to the rail decoration frame 90410 and the passage 90810 shifts. It is possible to suppress the loss of sex.

  Further, in the decorative frame 90800, a protrusion 90812 is formed on the surface facing the elastic member 90600 in a portion connected from the side surface portion 90811 of the passage 90810 to the portion 90410 'corresponding to the rail decorative frame 90410. The elastic member 90600 may be attached by press-fitting into a recess 90608 formed in the member 90600. By thus press-fitting the projection 90812 into the recess 90608 of the elastic member 90600, positional deviation of the elastic member 90600 can be prevented.

  In the embodiment, the elastic member 90600 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. However, the elastic member 90600 is not limited to a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. For example, the elastic member 90600 may be formed in line symmetry or point symmetry such as cubic shape. For example, as shown in the second modification of FIG. 68, the elastic member 90600 formed in a cubic shape has four surfaces where the through holes 90602 are not bored as the collision surface 90601, and one collision surface 90601. When the ball wears, the direction of the elastic member 90600 may be changed to make the other colliding surface 90601 the surface on which the game ball collides. As a result, even if a part of the elastic member 90600 is tampered with, by changing the direction of the elastic member 90600, it is possible to prevent the effect due to the fraud. In addition, one elastic member 90600 can be used for a long time.

  Further, a predetermined mark portion 90610 is provided at a position corresponding to one of a plurality of colliding surfaces 90601 parallel to the through hole 90602 in a surface (for example, an upper surface) orthogonal to the through hole 90602 in the elastic member 90600. Is preferred. In this way, if the colliding surface 90601 corresponding to the mark portion 90610 is used as a reference, it becomes easy to understand which colliding surface 90601 is used. Also, if the arrangement position of the mark portion 90610 with respect to the rail decoration frame 90410 is determined, it is specified that there is a possibility that fraudulent behavior has occurred when the arrangement position of the mark portion 90610 with respect to the rail decoration frame 90410 has changed. It will be easier.

  In addition, the mark portion 90610 may be provided by coloring or recessing, or when the elastic member 90600 is manufactured by die molding, when die cutting is performed by extruding with an ejector pin. You may use using the ejector pin trace etc. which are formed in these.

  In addition, as shown in the third modification of FIG. 69, the second holding portion 90423 of the rail decorative frame 90410 is the back surface 90606 of the elastic member 90600 (the opposite side to the surface facing the first holding portion 90421 in the elastic member 90600). Engaging projections 90428 that engage with the Thereby, position shift of elastic member 90600 can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 69, on the back surface 90606 of the elastic member 90600, an abutting portion 90607 may be formed to project from the back surface 90606 and abut on the game board 902. Thereby, position shift of elastic member 90600 can be prevented.

  Further, although the pachinko gaming machine 901 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine in the embodiment described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, gaming balls having a predetermined number of balls can circulate inside the gaming machine And the number of balls used for the game is reduced and stored, while the number of balls that have been enclosed and is lent out in response to a player's request for lending, or the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning is added. The present invention is also applicable to so-called enclosed game machines. In these enclosed game machines, not the gaming balls but points or points are awarded to the player, so the points or points given are the gaming values.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball game ball (pachinko ball) is applied as an example of the game medium, but it is not limited to the ball game medium, for example, non-ball game medium such as medals It may be

  Further, in the embodiment, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value At the same time, one game is ended by the variable display result being derived on the variable display device capable of the variable display of a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified respectively, and the winning is achieved according to the variable display result derived on the variable display device The present invention is also applicable to slot machines in which

  The present invention is suitably applied to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines that allow a player to play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9c, 9d 4th symbol display area 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 18c combined hold memory display part 20 special Variable winning ball device 31 game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control 80 Effect control board 100 Microcomputer for effect control 101 CPU for effect control
109 VDP
901 Pachinko gaming machine 9050 Glass door frame 90162a Plate presser bracket 90174 Rail presser piece 90410 Rail decorative frame 90421 1st holding portion 90422 Projection portion 90423 2nd holding portion 90501 Inner rail 90504T, 90504U Fixing portion 90505A, 90505B, 90505C Non-fixing portion 90506T , 90506 U Screw holes 90507A to 90507F Protrusions 90509 Grooves 90510 Protrusions 90511 Small holes 90512 Flanges 90513 Side walls 90600 Elastic members 90601 Collision surface 90602 Through holes

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of controlling a game medium in an advantageous state by firing game media in a game area and performing variable display when predetermined conditions are satisfied,
With the game board,
A rail member attached to the gaming board so as to surround the gaming area and guiding gaming media;
A colliding object on which the game medium collides,
A first holder attached to the game board and holding the collision target at a predetermined position on the game board;
A second holding body for holding the first holding body;
Detection means capable of detecting an operation of the player on the operation means ;
Promotion notification means capable of executing a promotion notification for urging the player to operate the operation means ;
Effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the detection of the player's operation on the operation means by the detecting means;
And a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect of any of the plurality of effect modes during execution of the variable display,
The promotion notification means is
The promotion notification for prompting an operation, and table Shimesuru first pattern first promotion image showing the least operating means, a second promotion image indicating an operation mode to said operating means in addition to the first accelerator image It can be executed by the second pattern to be displayed,
When the promotion notification is performed when the specific effect is performed, the user operates the operation mode in any one of a plurality of operation modes at different rates according to the effect mode of the specific effect being performed. It is possible to execute a prompting prompting,
Depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern is used to perform the promotion notification, it is possible to make the expectation for being controlled in the advantageous state different.
The rail member includes a fixed part fixed to the game board, and a non-fixed part which is a part not fixed to the game board and has flexibility.
The non-fixed portion has a contact portion,
The board surface of the gaming board is provided with an abutted part to which the abutment part can abut,
One of the contact portion and the contact portion is a protrusion, and the other is a hole into which the protrusion is inserted,
The protrusion and the hole extend in a direction orthogonal to the board surface of the game board,
When the rail member is attached to the game board, the protrusion is inserted into the hole, and the protrusion is inserted into the hole . A space is formed between it and the inner surface, and the projection abuts on the inner surface of the hole when the game medium collides with the non-fixed portion and the non-fixed portion moves.
A game machine characterized by